Revit MEP 2009

Imperial Tutorial

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Secondary Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System . Creating the Primary System Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Primary System Equipment . . . . . . . . . Inspecting and Color Coding the System . . . . . . . . . Creating Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Electrical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 31 . 35 . 39 . 45 . 47 . 47 . 57 . 60 . 63 . 72

Developing Your MEP Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

v

Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 77 . 88 . 94 . 95

Chapter 4

Mechanical Systems: Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . 101 . 108 . 112 . 136 . 141 . 148 . 153 . 156 . 160 . 162 . 168 . 185

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems: Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 . 189 . 196 . 200 . 204 . 217 . 230 . 249 . 252 . 260 . 263

Chapter 6

Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 269 . 274 . 280 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 291 . 296 . 303 . 304 . 309 . 314 . 320 . 325 . 331 . 338

Chapter 7

Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 . 344 . 345 . 346

vi | Contents

Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 346 . 352 . 359 . 371 . 376 . 382 . 390 . 398

Chapter 8

Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 . 406 . 410 . 432 . 445 . 451 . 458

Chapter 9

Creating Revit MEP Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Modifying Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Fan Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family . Modifying Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Water Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Light Fixture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol Family . . . . . . . . . . . . Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 . 470 . 474 . 483 . 488 . 491 . 493 . 498 . 498 . 507 . 518 . 555 . 561 . 561 . 568 . 568 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 571 . 571

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . 577 . 582 . 589 . 595 . 599 . 599 . 602 . 605 . 607 . 610 . 615 . 615

Contents | vii

Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Chapter 11

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 . 631 . 637 . 641 . 644 . 644 . 649 . 651 . 654 . 656 . 662 . 670 . 673 . 673 . 675 . 678 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 684

Chapter 12

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 . 688 . 692 . 692 . 702 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 713

Chapter 13

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 . 720 . 727 . 731 . 732 . 735 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 742 . 743 . 745

Chapter 14

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 . 761 . 767 . 767 . 769

viii | Contents

Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 769 . 773 . 779 . 779 . 781 . 783 . 784 . 790 . 791 . 791 . 792

Chapter 15

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Chapter 16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 . 815 . 823 . 827 . 830 . 830 . 833 . 836 . 836

Chapter 17

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 . 840 . 840 . 844 . 848 . 851 . 856

Chapter 18

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . 862 . 872 . 879

Chapter 19

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 . 894 . 903 . 906

Contents | ix

Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 908 . 911 . 911 . 913 . 916 . 918 . 919

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Chapter 21 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 . 925 . 927 . 929 . 930 . 933 . 933 . 937 . 939 . 942 . 947 . 949 . 950 . 953 . 953 . 954 . 959 . 961 . 964 . 965 . 967

x | Contents

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.

3

■ ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. 10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2009?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

Understanding the Basics | 5

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2009 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows, doors, and cabinets are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You

Understanding the Basics | 7

create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. While working in the drawing area. and View. click (New). You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In addition. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Edit. This creates a new project based on the default template. For example. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. you type the required key combination to perform the command. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. By default. which are listed on the menu. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click.

the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. When you select the Door tool. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. a door type is specified. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. On the left side of the Options Bar.

9 In the Type Selector. In the drawing area. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. For example. ■ The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. when you add a door. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

11 Click OK. immediately below the Type Selector. click the tab in the Design Bar. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. containing buttons grouped by function. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar.

In the Project Browser. families. sheets. reports. delete. and rename views. schedules. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and groups. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. and groups of your current project: ■ Right-click in the browser to add. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select Views (all). families.

click Wall. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. Do not click. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and group name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. 3D).■ The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. walls. The browser is dockable. The cursor displays as a pencil. double-click its name. After creating a browser organization scheme. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. family category (doors. elevations. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. To open a view. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . click Cancel. windows). 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector.

Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu.In the bottom left corner of the window. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). There are several tools that help you find information. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. 20 Press TAB. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Revit MEP 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2009 Help. The status bar also provides information. find a keyword on the Index tab. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. You can use this tri-pane. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. 18 On the Design Bar. in conjunction with tooltips. When you place the cursor over an element. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. In the status bar. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. It highlights when the cursor is over it. regarding selected elements in a view. In this case. click Modify to end the Wall command. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print.

■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. If no Help button displays. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. click on the Standard toolbar. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. press F1 for help. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 17 . For example. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Windows: From any window. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP In this exercise. Tooltips: To see tooltips. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click Training Files. and the topic specific to the dialog opens.In addition. After you are familiar with these tasks. In the following steps. press F1 for context-sensitive help. Click the Help button. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. Toolbar: From the toolbar. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse.

18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. the view zooms in on the selected area. 5 On the View toolbar. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. the view zooms out from the building model. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. 7 Click in the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. In the drawing area.

SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. To define settings for SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and click the SteeringWheels tab. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 10 To display SteeringWheels. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Settings menu ➤ Options. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. . moving the wheel to the desired location. on the View toolbar. To modify or add snap increments. press ESC. and then using the Zoom tool again. and click Help. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 15 To exit the wheel. As you move the mouse. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 19 .

19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. called drag controls. Small blue dots. Cnst. and double-click 2nd Flr. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. referred to as shape handles. Similar controls. click (Move). These are the drag controls. display along the ends. expand Floor Plans. 18 Click and drag the left control. as shown. and on the Tools toolbar. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. expand Views (all).Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and select the wall. to lengthen the wall. bottoms. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. 17 Type ZR. When drawing or modifying a building model. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.

After selecting the element to move. 23 Click next to the lower wall. and drag it on top of the table. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 21 . Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. such as Move and Copy. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. you want to move the table closer to the wall. In this case. for example. click to specify the starting position. 24 Select the plant. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. require 2 clicks to complete the command.Some commands. The table moves down.

Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. and click again to end it. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . or press CTRL+Z. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Press ESC twice. click Lines. such as the Lines command. 26 On the Undo menu. In this example. Move. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Some commands. select the second item in the list. 29 To end the command. click Modify.Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. On the Design Bar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the Undo command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Express Workshop 23 .

24 .

you add and connect the air handler. you place the variable air volume (VAV) box. which is the physical representation of the system. you create a supply air system that consists of 2 low pressure. The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1. and to place and size ductwork. you can create supply. an HVAC system is a logical connection between air terminals and HVAC mechanical equipment. and size the ductwork. and exhaust systems using these components. To create Mechanical Supply Air 2. high pressure system. you will have a basic understanding of Revit MEP design and documentation tools. Finally. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an MEP project. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. When you have finished these tutorials. After air terminals and mechanical equipment are placed in a model. In Revit MEP. connect it to existing air terminals. 25 . The systems are used to perform calculations and analysis. secondary supply air systems and a primary. Creating a Supply Air System In this lesson. return.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that are integral to the most common MEP workflows. You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. creating the primary supply system.

The Mechanical commands are displayed. you place a parallel. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Supply Air System. 2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. click Training Files. At the beginning of this exercise.Creating a Secondary Supply Air System In this exercise. fan-powered. If necessary. the model contains one completed secondary supply air system. VAV box in the model. scroll until the folder is displayed. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You then define a logical connection between the VAV box and 4 existing air terminals.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. you create the logical system shown above on the left. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. creating a secondary supply system. Display the Mechanical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. and click Mechanical. right-click the Design Bar. click the Mechanical tab.

Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. click Mechanical Equipment.In this tutorial. you can enter ZE to zoom out. The model zooms to the specified area. To pan. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. hold the wheel down and drag. 4 Type ZR. roll the wheel. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. Then. To zoom in and out. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. The entire model displays on the screen. In this tutorial. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 27 . which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. Add a VAV box 7 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you find the command at the far left of the screen. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region.

11 Click to place the VAV box in the location shown. 12 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4. select Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 3 . 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Modify to end the command.8 inch Inlet. 8 In the Type Selector. 10 Press SPACEBAR once to rotate the VAV box 90 degrees. but do not click. the Type Selector displays the mechanical equipment that is pre-loaded in the model. The cursor displays as the VAV box outline.Directly above the Design Bar.

Verify that the PrimaryToSupplyRatio is 0. you can enter 10 0 without units. indicating that it has been selected. ■ 15 Click OK. verify that SupplyAirFlow is set to 900 CFM. 18 Click to select the air terminal. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box.) ■ Under Mechanical . this value is automatically updated to reflect the supply airflow requirement. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 29 . This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. enter 10' 0".Airflow. The air terminal turns red. You do not need to enter the units. 14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. This value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the Level 1 ceiling and the Level 2 floor. and click Element Properties. 16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box.13 Right-click the VAV box.200000 (20%). for Offset. 19 Move the cursor off the air terminal. After the system is created. or just 10. Create the system 17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it.

When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected air terminals. (Create Supply Air System). and click to select it. the air terminals display in red. select the 2 supply air terminals to the right. click Modify to end the command. click 23 On the Options Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Verify the elements of the system 26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created. 24 Select the VAV box you just placed. 27 On the Options bar. the equipment supplying the system.20 While pressing CTRL. and the number of elements that make up the system. click (Edit System). 22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. 21 While pressing CTRL. The Options Bar displays system information such as the system name. 25 On the Design Bar. click (Select Equipment For System). indicating that they are selected. You have created a secondary supply air system that includes 4 air terminals and a VAV box. move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right. The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system.

In this tutorial. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System The model now contains the logical connection for Mechanical Supply Air System 2. click Finish. You could change the name by overwriting it. 2 On the Options Bar. the secondary supply air system shown below on the left. you leave it unchanged. 31 Move the cursor off the air terminal.Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2. 3 On the Options Bar. Verify the connections between the system elements 29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. The sketch graphics highlight. Do not click. 28 In the Supply Air : Mechanical Supply Air 2 dialog. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 31 . for Solution Type. Specify the layout 1 Select an air terminal in the system you created. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. In this exercise. the ductwork.rvt. select Network. you complete the secondary system by adding ductwork. 30 Press TAB. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click (Layout Path). however. you create the physical connection for the system. Next. showing the logical connection between the components of the system.

10 Click OK. 4 On the Options Bar. (Show Next Solution) to display other suggested network 5 Click until the network solution shown below displays. for Duct Type. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Verify that Offset is 10' 0". click solutions. 7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex . which is located to the far left of the drawing area. Verify that the Maximum Flex Duct Length is 2’ 0”. 9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Specify the layout path settings 6 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. click Settings. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Layout.Round. thus maintaining the consistency of these systems within the project. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. select Branch. plumbing. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". Configuring the layout path settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during the project. select Main.A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green. for Duct Type. 8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. piping. The layout path settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. and fire protection systems. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected.

Do not click. A disconnection will negatively impact calculations involving this system. Select Ducts. Check the connectivity of the system You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key. 16 Press TAB until the entire hierarchy of connected ducts. Size the duct system 21 On the Options Bar. The branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 15 Press TAB again to highlight the next level of connections. Revit MEP supports 4 of the most common sizing methods: Friction.Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect the components of the system. 22 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ Under Sizing Method. and a disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. select Friction. the system has not been created properly. and type SD. You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components. 18 On the Options Bar. Click Check None. If the entire network does not highlight. 17 Click to select the highlighted system. 20 Click OK. Equal Friction. Velocity. and equipment is highlighted. fittings. and Static Regain. click View menu ➤ Shading with Edges. or click in an empty part of the drawing area. 13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. Select Duct Fittings. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection).08 in-wg/100ft. and enter . 14 Press TAB. click Sizing. Select Flex Ducts. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 33 . 12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading.

Airflow. 36 On the Options Bar. 28 Click OK. select Calculated Size Only. Verify the sizing 25 In the system you created. click (Element Properties). 26 On the Options Bar. 29 Press ESC to clear the selection. scroll to Mechanical . The Flow value of 300 CFM is the sum of the 2 air terminals. click (Element Properties). Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box. you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems.Airflow.Airflow. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 Click OK. 34 Press ESC to clear the selection. click Modify to end the command. 30 Select the segment of duct shown. The ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings. Under Constraints. 31 On the Options Bar. 35 Select the VAV box in the system. 38 Press ESC to clear the selection. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. for Branch Sizing. select the segment of duct shown. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 Click OK. the adjusted SupplyAirFlow value of 625 CFM for the VAV reflects the supply airflow values calculated for the system. The Flow value of 150 CFM matches the required flow for the air terminal.■ ■ Verify that Only is selected. scroll to Mechanical .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. 37 Click OK. The ductwork is sized using the friction method at . Next. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Mechanical . In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties).

For D:. For Offset. 3 To start the duct run. 5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV.rvt. click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems. select 10' 0".Creating the Primary System Ductwork In this exercise. 4 Click in the location shown to end the first segment of ductwork. click Duct. This specifies the duct diameter. Create the primary air duct 1 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Round Duct : Taps. ■ The cursor displays as a pencil. in the location shown by the pencil. you create the main trunk line for the primary system and connect the 2 secondary systems. select 12". and click to place the second segment of ductwork and end the run. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 35 .

you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except for the end that connects to the air source. click Duct Fitting.6 Press ESC twice to end the command. 9 On the Design Bar. The ductwork and the proper fittings are automatically created. ■ ■ Click again to undo to first section of duct. 10 In the Type Selector. Draw the main trunk line again. 11 Place the cursor over the end of the duct to display an endpoint snap point. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as described above. 8 Type ZR. and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line. The model is zoomed to the end of the duct. Add an end cap Before you size the ductwork for a system. do the following: ■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar. This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct sizing. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct. 7 If your trunk line does not match the above illustration and you want to draw it again.

This connects the end cap to the ductwork. click Modify to end the command. 17 On the Options Bar. select Connector 0 : Supply Air: Round : 8" Primary Air Connector. you use the Connect Into tool to automatically draw the duct. 18 In the Select Connector dialog.12 Press TAB until the point snap graphic shown below displays. 13 Click to place the end cap. 15 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. click 19 Click OK. closing the right end of the duct run. (Connect Into). Connect one secondary system You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 37 . the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen. 14 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the primary air duct. 16 Select the leftmost VAV. In addition to the graphic at the cursor. First.

and zoom in on the rightmost VAV box. 22 Select the VAV box.Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap connection. 23 Right-click the 8” inlet supply connector. you manually draw the connecting duct. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 21 Type ZR. and click Draw Duct. Connect the other secondary system Next.

Adding the Primary System Equipment | 39 .rvt. The ductwork is created with a tap connection. primary system.24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X) displays. you place an air handler and connect it to the main trunk line to complete the high pressure. Place the air handler 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 26 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. select Air Handler : 10 ton. Do not click. 3 Move the cursor to the location shown. Adding the Primary System Equipment In this exercise. 25 On the Design Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. you add and connect the air handler for the primary system. Next. click Modify to end the command. 2 In the Type Selector. i Express Workshop Supply Air System.

click Modify to end the command. Create a vertical section of duct 8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it.The cursor displays as the air handler outline. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the air handler to the location shown. Do not click. 4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 Click to place the air handler.

for the hydronic supply and return. These are the connectors for the air handler supply. click (Apply Current Offset). ■ Adding the Primary System Equipment | 41 . return. Under Offset. and exhaust. intake. select Rectangular Duct/Radius Elbows Tees. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. 10 Move the cursor over the 24" x 24" supply connector. On the Options Bar. select 10' 0". 11 Right-click the connector. and click Draw Duct. The connectors on the front of the unit. are also visible. The connectors on the top of the unit are displayed.9 Click to select the air handler.

19 Move the cursor to the right. 16 Close the 3D HVAC view. 14 In the Project Browser. 18 Right-click the center point of the duct. 15 Double-click 3D HVAC. past the end of the primary duct. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. and click. 13 Press ESC. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. The vertical section of duct you just created is visible.A vertical section of duct is created. and click Draw Duct. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Attach a rectangular duct 17 Select the vertical duct you just created.

and then select the rightmost VAV box. Create the main system logical connection 21 While pressing CTRL. select the leftmost VAV box. 22 On the Options bar: ■ Click Click (Create Supply Air System). 26 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components. click (Element Properties). ■ 23 Select the air handler.20 Press ESC twice to end the command. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 43 . 24 Press ESC. 25 Select the air handler. (Select Equipment for System).

Airflow.In the Element Properties dialog. The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings. 33 On the Design Bar. This is the capacity of the air handler.815 CFM. In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection. 30 On the Options Bar. 37 Press ESC to clear the selection. notice that the value for SupplyAirFlow is 32. click (Element Properties). 35 On the Options Bar. 34 Select the air handler. the value for SupplyAirFlow has been updated based upon the primary to supply ratio you specified in the element properties of the 2 VAV boxes. Connect the ductwork 29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar. click (Trim/Extend). View the system components 38 On the Design Bar. 27 Click OK. 36 Click OK.Airflow. click Modify to end the command. verify that (Trim/Extend to Corner) is selected. click System Browser. under Mechanical . under Mechanical . 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 31 Select the 24" x 24" rectangular supply duct by clicking a point on the duct between the air handler and the primary trunk line. 32 Select the primary 12" round duct.

41 When you are done. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. Inspect the completed supply air system 1 In the Project Browser. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. You then add a legend to automatically color code the ductwork based on specific calculated values. click (System Inspect). Inspecting and Color Coding the System | 45 . Next. and double-click 3D HVAC. close the System Browser. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model.The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you inspect part of the system you created. 2 Select a section of a secondary system. the secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise. Inspecting and Color Coding the System In this exercise.rvt. 39 In the System Browser. 40 Expand any Supply Air system to view its HVAC components. expand Mechanical (3 systems). The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created. you inspect the system and color code the ductwork. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. and the secondary system that was already in the model when you opened it. 3 On the Options Bar.

click Inspect. select Duct Color Fill . 8 On the Design Bar. including flow. click Cancel Inspector. 9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 On the Design Bar. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. under Color Scheme. the red arrows indicate critical flow path. static pressure. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Flow. 4 On the Design Bar. visual indication of a system’s air flow. 5 Move the cursor over a section of the system. The inspection tag describes the section that is being inspected. the other systems are displayed in half tone. Place a legend and color code the ductwork Color coding the ductwork provides a quick. The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow values. and pressure loss. 7 Close the 3D HVAC view. 11 Click OK. Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork 12 Select the legend. The flow arrows indicate flow direction.The selected system maintains its appearance.

One circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on one side of a room in the model. distribution systems. and demand factors have been defined. click 15 Click OK. voltage definitions. The legend remains selected. The model already contains the electrical components you use to create the systems. Creating Lighting Circuits In this exercise. You use the System Browser to view the created circuits.13 On the Options Bar. Creating Electrical Systems In this lesson. and switches. After creating the logical connections. power circuits. including power panels. and the color scheme is removed from the legend. junction boxes. select none. Electrical settings have already been specified for the model. The color is removed from the ductwork. 16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window. . Creating a Supply Air System. click 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. temperature rating. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. You then automatically balance the electrical loads on a panelboard. click No. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Wiring types (including material. receptacles. As you create circuits. junction boxes. Revit MEP ensures that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. lighting fixtures. 18 When prompted to save the model. and insulation type). the other circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on the other side of the room. 14 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and a 480V panelboard that have already been placed in the model. Creating Electrical Systems | 47 . you create the physical connections between the components: the wiring. you create 2 lighting circuits using lighting fixtures. (Delete) to delete the legend. under Schemes.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this tutorial. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ Open the i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll until the folder is displayed. Display the Electrical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. The Electrical commands are displayed. you find the command at the far left of the screen. right-click the Design Bar. If necessary.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. click Training Files. and click Electrical. click the Electrical tab. 2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar.

Then. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. To pan. you can enter ZE to zoom out. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. hold the wheel down and drag. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. roll the wheel. In this tutorial. Creating Lighting Circuits | 49 . Create a lighting circuit 7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model. The model zooms to the specified area. To zoom in and out. The entire model displays on the screen.Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 4 Type ZR. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region.

indicating that it has been selected. indicating that they are selected. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures. move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture. 8 Click to select the lighting fixture. and click to select it. 9 Move the cursor off the lighting fixture. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The lighting fixture turns red. select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures. 11 While pressing CTRL. they display in red. 10 While pressing CTRL.The lighting fixture highlights.

13 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits | 51 . click (Create Power Circuit). (Select a Panel for the Circuit). The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. click 14 Select lighting panel LP-1.12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. which is the logical connection between the elements. The red sketch graphics show the created circuit.

all the elements within the window are selected.15 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. Create a second lighting circuit 16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as shown. 17 When you release the mouse button. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Select Lighting Fixtures. The lighting fixtures remain selected. The sketch graphics show the created circuit. click (Create Power Circuit). click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it. Click OK.18 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 While pressing CTRL. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). 22 On the Options Bar. click 23 Select lighting panel LP-1. Creating Lighting Circuits | 53 . which is the logical connection between the elements. Click Check None.

you have created 2 lighting circuits. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 25 Move the cursor over a lighting fixture in the leftmost circuit so that the lighting fixture highlights. 24 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. Modify a circuit At this point. Do not click. 26 Press TAB to display the circuit.The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run. The components include the 4 lighting fixtures and the junction box.

The circuit includes 4 lighting fixtures. 30 Select the junction box located among the lighting fixtures. click Finish. 27 Click to select the highlighted circuit. 31 In the Power : 1 dialog. 29 In the Power : 1 dialog. click (Edit Circuit). click (Add To Circuit). Verify the modified circuit 32 Highlight the junction box in the circuit and press TAB. Creating Lighting Circuits | 55 . 28 On the Options Bar.

34 Select lighting panel LP-1. 33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting. and you can view the system components using the System Browser. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . At this point. Display the electrical systems The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP. close the System Browser. you assign switches to control the lighting fixtures. 38 When you are done. click System Browser. 37 Expand the 2 circuits to view their electrical components. expand Electrical (7 Systems) ➤ Power ➤ LP-1. only the logical connections between the elements exist. 36 In the System Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. Next.The modified circuit is highlighted. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. The circuits become visible when the physical connections. the wiring. are created. The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. You can display the logical connections using the TAB key. Elements are listed by the system they belong to.

4 In the Switch System dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the only currently selected component of the system. click (Edit Switch System). Creating Switch Systems | 57 . click 5 Select the switch as shown.rvt. Create a switch system 1 Select the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the room. click (Create Switch System). you create switch systems to define switching behavior.Creating Switch Systems In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. The switches have already been placed in the model. (Select Switch). and the 4 lighting fixtures on the right are controlled by another switch. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. The 4 lighting fixtures on the left of the room are controlled by one switch. All elements in the drawing except the selected lighting fixture display in halftone.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Switch Properties). click (Add to System). 7 One by one. The switch system highlights. 13 Press TAB. 10 Click OK. The identifier A is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. 11 In the Switch System (A) dialog. Verify the switch system 12 Move the cursor over the switch to highlight it.The Options Bar displays the selected switch and the number of lighting fixtures currently selected (1). click Finish. 6 In the Switch System dialog. and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area. select the 3 remaining lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. As you select each lighting fixture. Assign an identifier to the switch 8 In the Switch System dialog.Lighting. under Electrical . the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated. 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Switch ID. enter A.

Create a second switch system 15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. enter B. 18 On the Options Bar. The selection is filtered. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Create Switch System). 20 In the Switch System dialog. Click Check None. 24 Click OK.14 Move the cursor away from the switch system to remove the highlighting. click (Switch Properties). The 4 lighting fixtures remain selected. Creating Switch Systems | 59 . click Finish. click 21 Select the switch as shown. Assign an identifier to the switch 22 In the Switch System dialog. Select Lighting Fixtures. for Switch ID. (Select Switch). The identifier B is assigned to the switch for reference purposes.Lighting. click 17 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 25 In the Switch System (B) dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. under Electrical . click 19 On the Options Bar. (Edit Switch System). Click OK.

3 Select the upper-left lighting fixture.Verify the switch system 26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. Then. Tagging Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. The lighting fixture is labeled with an automatically generated tag. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add a tag to each lighting fixture that identifies its type and the switch that controls it.rvt. click Tag ➤ By Category. The lighting requirements for the left side of the room are different from the lighting requirements for the right side of the room. clear Leader. so each side of the room requires a different lighting fixture type. Tag the lighting fixtures 1 On the Design Bar. you define the lighting fixture types for the room. you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures. Next. 2 On the Options Bar.

click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. select (Element Properties). The top part of the tag displays the identifier for the lighting fixture type. 5 Press ESC to end the command. 10 In the Name dialog: ■ ■ Enter 2x4 3Lamp A. for Type Mark. Create a new lighting fixture type 6 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. enter A. The selected lighting fixtures are tagged. 14 Press ESC to clear the selection. select the remaining 7 lighting fixtures in the room. Tagging Lighting Fixtures | 61 . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. 12 Click OK. click Duplicate. 4 One by one.The bottom part of the tag displays the identifier (A) for the switch that controls the lighting fixture. click Edit/New. which you have not yet defined. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data.

Change the type for the remaining lighting fixtures 19 While pressing CTRL. The cursor displays as an eyedropper. 16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched. For each lighting fixture.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp B. click (Match Type). and the tag is updated. 20 On the Options Bar. and their tags are automatically updated. Change the type for some lighting fixtures 15 On the Tools toolbar. select Troffer Corner Insert .The top part of the tag for the lighting fixture with the new type (Troffer Corner Insert . 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 18 Press ESC twice to end the command. select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. in the Type Selector. 17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type. the type is changed.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp A) is automatically updated to display type mark A.

24 Clear Lighting Fixture Tags. You then connect the 2 circuits to create a multi-circuit home run. while the other connects the 8 receptacles in the adjoining large room. Next. One circuit connects 2 electrical receptacles in a small room.rvt. Create a power circuit with wiring 1 While holding down CTRL. 23 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. on the Annotation Categories tab. Creating Power Circuits | 63 . The lighting fixture tags are no longer displayed in the model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. you use electrical receptacles and a 208 volt panelboard that have already been placed in the model to create 2 electrical circuits with arc type wiring. Turn off the tags 22 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you create electrical circuits with wiring. scroll to Lighting Fixture Tags. Creating Power Circuits In this exercise. 25 Click OK. select the 2 receptacles in the small room.

The sketch graphics show the created circuit home run. click 4 Select power panel PP-1. click (Create Power Circuit).2 On the Options Bar. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). The sketch graphics show the logical created circuit. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 3 On the Options Bar.

6 Press ESC to clear the selection. click as shown to create arc type wiring. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner. Creating Power Circuits | 65 .5 In the drawing area near the created circuit. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command. 8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown. View conductor information 7 Type ZR.

9 Select the wire shown. under Electrical . 12 Click OK. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. click (Element Properties). 10 On the Options Bar. neutral. and ground).Loads. verify the number of conductors of each type (hot. select the receptacle as shown. 13 Press ESC to clear the selection. Create a second circuit with wiring 15 In the large room. The tick marks indicate the number of conductors (3) for the wire.

17 On the Options Bar. for a total of 8 receptacles. Creating Power Circuits | 67 . click 19 Select power panel PP-1. The sketch graphics show the circuit and home run. The sketch graphics show the circuit. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). click (Create Power Circuit). 18 On the Options Bar.16 While pressing CTRL. select the remaining receptacles in the large room.

click as shown to create arc type wiring. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created.20 In the drawing area near the created circuit. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run.

Rewire a circuit 22 Select the home run wire for the small circuit. The wire is deleted. Creating Power Circuits | 69 . and zoom in on the region shown. 25 On the Design Bar. click Wire. 23 Right-click. and click Delete. 24 Type ZR. The cursor displays as a pencil with arc type wiring.21 Press ESC to clear the selection.

27 With the point snap graphic displayed. 28 Move the cursor to the location shown. but the point snap graphic is not displayed.26 Move the cursor to the location shown. 29 With the point snap graphic displayed. press TAB until the graphic displays. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . press TAB until the graphic displays. click to place the end of the wire. The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. If the cursor is positioned as shown. the displayed snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen. click to place the end of the wire. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. If the cursor is positioned as shown. In addition to the graphic in the drawing.

Creating Power Circuits | 71 . 30 On the Design Bar. The wires in the circuit have been automatically resized to accommodate the demand created by the new multi-circuit home run. Tag the wires 32 On the Design Bar. creating a multi-circuit home run. click Modify to end the command.The two circuits are automatically connected. 33 On the Options Bar. The 2 arrows on the large circuit home run indicate that it is now a multi-circuit home run. 34 Highlight a wire in the small circuit as shown. click Tag ➤ By Category. select Leader. View the multi-circuit home run 31 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view.

Balancing Electrical Loads In this exercise.rvt. PP-1 is highlighted to show that it is the currently displayed view. you view the panel schedule report for panelboard PP-1 and balance the electrical loads on this panel. 37 Click to place the label. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. scroll down as needed. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. click Modify to end the command. The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1). The Panel Schedule Report view opens. you balance the electrical loads on panelboard PP-1.The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1). 2 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Design Bar. View the panel schedule report 1 Select power panel PP-1. 35 Click to place the label. and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. click (Panel Schedule Report). 36 Highlight a wire in the large circuit as shown. 3 In the Project Browser. Next. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems.

for Appearance on Sheet. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. are shown. 6 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. All the circuits connected to the panel are listed. and the current loads on phases. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. (Edit Circuits on Panel). click Rebalance Loads. The loads are balanced across each phase. A. 12 Click OK. under Panel Schedule.4 In the Project Browser. and the circuit structure is automatically reorganized. Balancing Electrical Loads | 73 . under Other. click OK. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. Balance the loads on the panel 9 Select power panel PP-1. right-click PP-1. B. 8 Close the Panel Schedule Report view. click Edit. and click Properties. and C. click The Edit Circuits dialog displays.

13 Click File menu ➤ Close. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The reorganized circuit structure is reflected in the wire labels. 14 When prompted to save the model. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Electrical Systems. click No.

Developing Your MEP Designs 75 .

76 .

After finishing each exercise. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spacial environment. as with any design project. 77 . Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. This system consists of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. you design a mechanical system for an office building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2009.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. methodology. you configure the linked architectural model. Then. you plan the system by first placing spaces in the building. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. you can choose to save your work. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis. you first carefully plan the system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. First. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. In this lesson. At the end of this tutorial. As you create the mechanical system. and contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you will understand the process. In this exercise. you create a plenum level and place various types of spaces.autodesk. If the tutorial datasets are not present. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. Planning Mechanical Systems To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you perform a heating and cooling load analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. However.Mechanical Systems 3 In this tutorial. After applying a color scheme to the zones. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. you place spaces in the areas of the building model. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. By following the recommended workflow.

5 On the Basics tab of the Design bar. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and after the linked model highlights. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 1 In the Project Browser. not in the MEP dataset. The linked model is configured. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. right-click. click the Training Files icon. The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 78 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .Mech. These components are defined in the architectural dataset. In this section. you add a level for plenums. Configure the linked model The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. This makes the architectural components (such as walls and floors) room-bounding so that they are recognized as boundaries for spaces. and double-click East . and click Element Properties. Next. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 Mech. make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. The elevation view opens. Open the i Spaces. click Modify. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate heating and cooling load analysis. select Room Bounding. NOTE When working with a linked file. expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 6 In the Project Browser. and that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the building.

for Level. ■ 10 Draw a plenum level 8' 6" above Level 1. For Cut plane. Click Plan View Types. and enter an Offset value of 0 0. verify that 0' 0" is specified. and press ENTER. and its listed in the Project Browser under Mechanical ➤ ???. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Draw) is selected. click Level. click Yes. verify that Level : Plenum is selected. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. enter an Offset of 1' 0" For Bottom. Under View Depth. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and click OK. and click Edit for View Range. Placing Spaces | 79 . and click Properties. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. In the View Range dialog. Under Identity Data. right-click Level 7. For Offset. and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan.7 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK twice. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. for Top. If asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 8 In the Type Selector. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. select Level Above (Level 2). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 7 is created. 9 On the Options Bar. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. Scroll down to the Extents category. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view. Verify that Leader is cleared. 18 On the Options Bar. This action specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Upper Limit. New indicates that a new space is being placed. Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view. ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. Verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. In the Space box. select Level 1 Plenum. double-click 1 . For Offset. The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs. the 1 . 15 Use the mouse scroll wheel. under Floor Plans. 80 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . enter 0' 0" . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.Mech.Mech view is not maximized or the elevation view was closed. click Space. 16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. 17 Verify that Space Tag is selected in the Type Selector. The Space box contains all unplaced spaces (spaces that were placed in unbounded areas). and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building. Place a space in an office area and in an open area 13 In the Project Browser. If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable.The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. verify that New is selected. and maximize the window.

21 With the Space tool open. Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown. 22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan. and click Zoom to Fit. and after the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not activated. Later in the exercise. click to place a space as shown. you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there.20 Click to place the space. You activate this visibility later in this exercise. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area. Placing Spaces | 81 .

25 Click the space tag name. A text box appears. you rename the 2 spaces. Next. 82 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office.23 Click Modify.

29 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. expand Spaces. You apply color fill to spaces in a later exercise. you activate spaces visibility. and click in the drawing area. Open 104. 28 With the view active. Color Fill displays space color fill when it is applied. 30 Click OK. enter VG on the keyboard. The Interior option displays space shading. 26 Double-click the space tag number. 27 Repeat this method. Interior. Reference displays space reference lines (cross hairs). and rename the space in the open area. enter 101 in the text box. and select Color Fill. Next. and Reference. Placing Spaces | 83 .Enter Office. The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view. and press ENTER.

Chain. click Space Separation. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Draw). enter ZR.Place a space in the entrance area You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated and cooled more often than the rest of the open space. For Offset. The entrance area is bound only by the radius wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of the radius wall as shown. right-click the Design Bar. and (Line) are selected. 31 With the 1 . 84 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . you need to make this area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines. 32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Mech view active. and click Mechanical. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. To place a space in the entrance area. verify that 0' 0" is specified.

The Draw tool remains open. Placing Spaces | 85 . and press ENTER to specify the end point for the first line segment. 34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall. 38 Draw the line down 32' 0". and click to specify the end point for the second line segment. NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area. and type 4' 0" (notice the text entry box called a dimension listener that pops up). select the space (reference line) or the space tag. select and drag both of them. 40 Press ESC twice to close the Draw tool. and click to specify the end point of the third line segment. and after the end point snap displays.■ Verify that Radius is cleared. If the space and space tag are inside the new area. The space separation line created a new fully-bounded area within the large open area. If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space. 36 Draw the line up. 39 Move the cursor to the left 4' 0" (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall). Notice that the Open 104 space adjusted its boundaries so that it is not in the new area. 35 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom out the view. 37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 32' 0". click Move to Space. and drag it to the larger open area. click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment. and after the end point snap displays. click to specify the end point for the last line segment.

space separation lines are not recognized in Revit Architecture.NOTE Space separation lines are MEP-specific room-bounding lines that separate areas where a wall is not desired or not possible. you place a space in the entrance area. enter 121. 43 Place a space in the entrance area. Although room separation lines are recognized in Revit MEP. 41 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter Entrance. and verify that New is slected in the Space box. right-click and click Element Properties. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Number. 45 Place the cursor over the space. 44 Click Modify. 86 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . click Space. verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. select Level 1 Plenum for Upper Limit. 42 On the Options Bar. Next. verify that Leader is cleared. under Identity Data. after the space reference lines highlight. After the areas are separated. spaces can be placed in them. enter 0 0 for Offset. For Name.

click Space. This is because the walls prevent space placement. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. 50 On the Options Bar. Roof is specified for the upper limit because the chase area spans multiple levels and ends at the roof level. Notice that the plenum space is not in the mechanical room or in the stairwell. and enter 0 0 for Offset. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. Chase 118. Placing Spaces | 87 . 49 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 53 Rename the space. Place a space in a chase area 48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room. select Level 2 for Upper Limit. expand Spaces. and click to place a space. and select Interior and Reference. 52 Press Esc. 51 Place a space in the chase area. 58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active. The offset places the space 2 feet above the roof. 57 Place the cursor in the plenum area. 55 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Space. select Roof for Upper Limit. and enter 2 0 for Offset. 60 Click OK. 59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. The plenum space displays in the floor plan view. Place a space in a plenum area 54 In the Project Browser. 56 On the Options Bar. The space is renamed Entrance 121.47 Click OK. double-click Level 1 Plenum.

Otherwise. you modified the spaces visibility for the views. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.Mech to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. that action removes the space from the Default zone. 88 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . You used space separation lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Creating Zones After spaces are placed in the building. and click Save. enter Spaces Training for File name. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. navigate to the folder of your choice. you add spaces to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 1 In the Project Browser.61 If you want to save your work. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines. close the file. When you add a space to a zone. However. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise. In the next exercise. you can choose to save your work. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Open the i Zones. and double-click 1 . 2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Finally. click File menu ➤ Save.

The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and modify the zone properties. and a new zone is created. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. This removes the space from the Default zone. You work with one zone until you click Finish. Creating Zones | 89 . The Zone tool opens. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The title bar displays the name of the new zone. place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space highlights. Assign a zone to spaces on the same level 5 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. As you do this. This is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 7 In the drawing area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. click Zone. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 3 Right-click in Systems Browser. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and click View ➤ Zones. After a space is placed in an area. 6 On the Zone toolbar. you assign spaces to a zone. Using the Zone toolbar. the Zone toolbar displays.NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. Next.

14 Expand the 1 . click (Zone Properties). and click OK. 12 On the Zone toolbar.8 Click the space to add it to the zone. Next. expand HVAC Zones. To view the zone in the drawing area.West Offices. you rename the zone. In the System Browser. and click OK. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. expand the new zone and notice that the Office 101 space is added to it and removed from the Default zone. enter VG.West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. under Identity Data. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. The new zone displays. add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone. 11 With the Zone toolbar open. 90 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . you need to activate the zone visibility which you do next. for Name enter 1 . 9 With the drawing area active. Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser.

expand HVAC Zones. 20 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Mech floor plan. Next.15 On the Zone toolbar. Creating Zones | 91 . and click OK. 27 On the Zone toolbar. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. 26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone. verify that ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. Assign a zone for spaces on different levels 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view. 22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 25 With the Zone toolbar open. 24 On the 1 . 21 Zoom in on each floor plan. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. 17 With the drawing area active. click Zone. click Finish.Mech to make it the active view. 23 On the Zone toolbar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 19 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan: 1 . enter VG. click Finish. add the following level 1 spaces to the zone: Open 104 Men’s Room 105 Mech/Elec 106 Ladies Room 107. you activate zones visibility for the view. click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active.

28 In either view. Next. under Identity Data. you cannot open the Zone tool as this will create a new zone. click (Zone Properties). enter 1 . for Name. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. However. and click OK. and click Properties. you edit the zone to rename it.Open Offices. TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser. Notice that the Zone toolbar displays the name of the zone that you are editing. click Edit Zone. select the reference line to the zone that you created.You need to rename the zone. 29 On the Options Bar. 92 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . The Zone tool opens. 30 On the Zone toolbar.

In this exercise. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and Creating Zones | 93 . use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in the building. Men’s Room 205. Otherwise. click Finish. click File menu ➤ Save. All zones will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise.West Offices Chases 34 If you want to save your work. navigate to the folder of your choice. 103 Stairwells 114. 102. 202. 211. and click Save. 35 In the Save As dialog. Elec/Mech 206. The table below lists all spaces and the zones. Office 209 Open 204. enter Zones Training for File name.Open Offices 1 . Ladies Room 207.Conference Room 2 . 110 Open 104. 216 Offices 201.Entrance 1 . 116. you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the building. 119. Make certain that you verify the spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser If you prefer not to continue with this practice. L2 Plenum 217 Offices 215.North Offices 2 . 113 Entrance 121 Offices 108. You can expand the 1 . Complete the zones for the building 33 For additional practice. You activated zone visibility in the views. proceed to the next step.North Offices 1 .South Offices 1 . close the file. 32 On the Zone toolbar. 213 Conference 214 Offices 210. 112. 203 Chases 118. Men’s Room 105.East Offices 1 .Open Offices 2 . 120 Zones 1 .South Offices 2 . 212 Lounge 208.The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. Ladies’ Room 107.Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it.West Offices Stairwells 2 . Spaces Offices 111. L1 Plenum 122 Offices 115. 117 Offices 101.East Offices 2 . Elec/Mech 106. 109.

Open the i Zone Color Scheme. The zones are also listed in the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The color scheme is applied to the zones in the 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 1 . 94 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. 6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using space schedules or accessing element properties. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click to place the legend. In the next exercise. Verify that Schema 1 is selected for Color Scheme. you apply a color scheme to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. you assign a color scheme to these zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. Apply the color scheme 5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. click the Training Files icon.Mech to make it the active view. You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading. right-click the Design Bar. 7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Color Scheme Legend.Mech view. and click Drafting. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise.in the System Browser.

In this exercise. and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Specify Project Settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Level 1 Plenum. and Level 2 Plenum floor plan views. and view the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. ■ Click for Location. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis In this exercise. and click Save.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.8 For additional practice. NH for City. 10 In the Save As dialog. click Edit for Energy Data. select Manchester. use the method that you learned and add a color scheme for the zones on the 2 . navigate to the folder of your choice. and view the loads report. Open the i Energy Analysis. For Postal Code. click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 9 If you want to save your work. In the next exercise. you verify the building. All color schemes will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Office is specified for Building Type. proceed to the next step. If you prefer not to continue with this practice.Mech. space. and zone information. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 95 . You then perform a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 2 In the Element Properties dialog under Energy Analysis. enter 03101. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Heating and Cooling Loads. IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Next. verify that Manchester. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Then. A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the building. select Level 1. (Building ■ ■ For Building Service (Default Space Service). Verify that <Building> is specified for Building Construction. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). Default Space Construction. 7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and do the following: ■ ■ For Building Type. 96 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Verify area and volume setting 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Verify that Shading surfaces is selected. Verify that 1' 0" is specified for Sliver Space Tolerance. After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that VAV .■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that VAV . click Edit for Energy Data. verify that <Building> is selected. you need to select this option. NH is selected. under Energy Analysis. 5 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Building Construction. Click OK twice. For Ground Plane. if you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Place and Location. verify that Office is selected.Single Duct is selected. Verify building information 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You have verified the building information. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Single Duct is specified for Building Service. and click OK. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Verify that New Construction is selected for Project Phase.

and zoom the model to better view the space. while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel.East Offices zone. Next. The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. pan. spin the model as shown. The space for Office 111 highlights in red. 13 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. and select Office 111. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 97 . NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space. you isolate a space. verify that Wireframe is selected (default setting). 10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin. 12 Click (Highlight). 9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The analytical volume is bounded by the center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors. 11 Expand the 1 .View a space 8 In the preview pane. click the Spaces/Zones tab.

NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. Verify space information 19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 17 Using the methods that you learned. and other room-bounding components. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. Next.14 With Office 111 selected. floors. 16 On the View Selector . The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. click Shading. you view the volume of the space differently. 15 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. you verify space information. select Office 111. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces that normally would be obstructed by other spaces or by the architecture which would normally make it difficult to view. highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its inner volume. roofs. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. click (Isolate). the space information displays for the selected space. Office 111. 98 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 18 Next. Below the list of spaces and zones.

including Office 111. 70. This specified the number of people or the area per person for the space. This zone information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the spaces in the zone. This specifies the heating set point. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties dialog.East Offices.00 °F : 90. and verify the space and zone information.20 Under the list of spaces and zones. 25 Click 1 . you verify the zone information. heating air temperature. <Default> is specified for People Data. ■ ■ IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. the zone information displays for the selected zone.00 °F : N/A for Heating Information.East Offices zone: ■ ■ <Building> is specified for Service Type. view other spaces and zones in the building model. verify the following space information: ■ <Building> is specified for Space Type and Construction Type.East Offices. Below the list of spaces and zones. This specifies the outdoor air per person. 26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 . right-clicking. N/A : N/A : N/A is specified for Outdoor Air Information. You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone information. This displays the analytical volume of the spaces in the selected zone. 1 . 23 As you did earlier. This zone contains 3 spaces. (Isolate) tools to view the analytical 24 Click (Shading). Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as space and zone properties. respectively.00 °F : 54. 22 On the Spaces/Zones tab. and humidification set point. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 99 . and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the 1 -East Offices zone.East Offices. select 1 . outdoor air per area. 74. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. click Wireframe. and air changes per hour. You can also access the space and zone information by selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser.00 °F : N/A for Cooling Information. Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data. cooling air temperature. and dehumidification set point. View other spaces and zones 27 Using the methods that you learned. use the (Highlight) and volume of the spaces in the selected zone. ■ ■ View a zone and zone information 21 On the View Selector . and clicking Element Properties. Next. This specifies the cooling set point.

click Calculate. close the file. space. In the next lesson. and a loads report displays. and zone information for the building model. or zoom the view to see the selected space or zone. pan. click File menu ➤ Save. For example. space. or zone information. or make any changes to the model. or by pressing SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 28 On the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 29 Review the loads report. you can perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. the People Data option becomes blank. 100 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . building. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. This product is not included with Revit MEP. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. or import the IES model that has already been created. Now that the project. and zone information has been verified.You may need to spin. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 31 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. Various factors are analyzed including analytical and inner volumes of the spaces. NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information. and click Save. 30 If you want to save your work. this report includes project. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data. Otherwise. In this exercise. and zone information. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. space. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Revit MEP performs a heating and cooling loads analysis using the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool that was developed in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). weather. You must have IES <VE> installed. TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. you verified building. that information does not display. space.

modify air terminal parameters. and then you validate your air system design. you create new views. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise.Mechanical Systems:Air 4 Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. As you place the air terminals. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify a ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. After completing the air systems lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. and click View Properties. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. adding AC units. After system creation. and double-click 1 . sizing ductwork. In this lesson.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties). click the Training Files icon. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. you will create supply air systems. Open the i Air Terminals. Then. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. 101 . You can also select the 1 .

8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7".Ceiling Mech is the active view. For example. 6 Click OK twice. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. separate the value with a space. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. for the Level parameter. and enter 8 7 for Offset. NOTE The ceiling hosts the diffuser. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. make sure that Place on Face is selected. 10 On the Options bar. 11 Click to place the supply air terminal in the upper left office as shown. 5 In the View Range dialog. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . for the Cut plane parameter. for the Top parameter.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. 102 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and enter 8' 7" for Offset.3 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 0 for Offset. Under View Depth. 9 In the Type Selector. do the following: ■ ■ Select Level 1 for Underlay. click Air Terminal. select Supply Diffuser . You specify 8' 7" so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 8' 6") and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. ■ ■ TIP When entering a value. Under Primary Range. under Graphics.

click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. 19 On the Options Bar. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. and then click Modify.use the arrow keys for fine movement control. click to specify the move start point. the command in progress terminates. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. then select Multiple. enter 300 CFM for Flow. You can also press Esc to accomplish this result. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 13 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. you may have to move it to center it -. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile. click Modify. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 17 Move the air terminal to the location shown. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected. Placing Air Terminals | 103 .12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. TIP To use the Move tool. Since snaps are not available here. TIP When you click Modify. and then click the midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. 14 On the Options Bar.

Notice that after you specify the copy start point. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. click Air Terminal. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method.Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. 22 In the Type Selector. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. listening dimensions display to aid placement. 104 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . select Exhaust Diffuser . TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar.

24 In the Type Selector. and specify a 325 CFM airflow for each of them. place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of the restrooms.Before you copy the exhaust diffuser. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 250 CFM. 25 Using the same placement method. select Return Diffuser . Placing Air Terminals | 105 .Hosted: Workplane-based Return Diffuser.

click Modify. and click OK. right-click. and click Element Properties. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. 106 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. clear the UpArrow check box. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. under Mechanical. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area.

You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. continue laying out the level 1 supply system. Placing Air Terminals | 107 . 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1. create the level 2 supply system.Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. Optional: Create the level 2 air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. 30 Select the Office 101 air terminal. click on the Edit toolbar. do the following for level 2: ■ Make 2 . After you place the supply air terminals.Ceiling Mech the active view. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process.

You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. Specify 325 CFM airflow for the supply and return diffusers. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. In this exercise. modified the air terminal parameters. More importantly. click File menu ➤ Save. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. specify the same view parameters as 1 . collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. and click Save. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. and 250 CFM airflow for the exhaust diffusers. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. You will be using different views to design the systems. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools.■ In the Element Properties dialog. 33 If you want to save your work. navigate to the folder of your choice. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. and learned a method for precise placement. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. In this exercise. 34 In the Save As dialog. 108 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . In the next exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you create the air systems. click the Training Files icon. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.

1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 109 . 10 In the Calculated Value dialog. 5 Under Select available fields from. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Verify that Formula is selected. click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow Space: Name Space: Number 7 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. Select Air Flow for Type. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces. Select HVAC for Discipline. under Available fields. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. select Flow. ■ ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 4 Add Mark and System Type. Click OK. select Air Terminals. do the following: ■ Under Category. select the field and click Remove. Create a calculated value parameter 9 Click Calculated Value.■ Open the i Air System Schedules. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Actual Calculated Airflow for Name. 6 While pressing Ctrl.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. select Space. 8 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Number Space: Name Mark System Type Flow Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field.

Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and Count and totals.■ Use the button on the right to enter Space: Actual Supply Airflow . ■ ■ The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule. select System Type for Filter by. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. Format the calculated value parameter 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Filter tab. Select Not Between for Test.Space: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. Click OK twice. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. Next. Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog. Verify that Ascending is selected. Click OK. A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. and Itemize every instance is selected. and select Supply Air. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. The red values in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 CFM. Select Footer. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. Enter -35 CFM and 35 CFM for Value. 11 Click OK. and click Conditional Format. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select Actual Calculated Airflow. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Space: Number for Sort by. Select Blank line. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. Use the schedule as a design tool 15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. Organize the data 14 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. equals. in the Fields list.

The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. speeds the design process. TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules. 18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. select the 300 CFM Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air terminal. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. 19 In the schedule. and press Tab. Optional: Modifying Other Parameters The drawing for the next exercise provides completed values. The Actual Calculated Airflow value displays in white indicating that it now complies with the Office 101 airflow design requirements. 22 Select By Category. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 111 . under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 20 Delete 300 CFM enter 250. 16 In the Project Browser. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. 23 On the Options bar. 25 Modify the other supply air terminal Flow parameters for both floors so that the airflow design requirements are met.This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. rather than one by one in a drawing. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. double-click 1 Mech to make it the active view. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. 24 Click on a diffuser to add a tag. Tagging an Air Diffuser 21 Select Tag from the Mechanical tab on the Design bar. click Leader to clear this option. the selected air terminal displays in red. NOTE If a different project is also open. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. 17 Enter ZR.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 27 If you want to save your work. Open the i Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. under Extents. and then create the logical connection between the system components. and click View Properties. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. you create air systems. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. and click Save. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. enter an Offset value of 10 0. you are changing the air terminal connector size. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. click Edit for View Range. This is the power of BIM. all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in white. and double-click 1 . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 26 Close the schedule view.Mech floor plan view. for the Top parameter. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. During this exercise. Under Primary Range. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. click File menu ➤ Save. 28 In the Save As dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Unlike logical connections. After you modify the airflow parameters. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. click the Training Files icon. and maximize the 1 . In this exercise.Mech to make it the active view. 4 In the View Range dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 112 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . However. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. After creating the logical connection. navigate to the folder of your choice.

For now. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. air terminals. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 11 With the view active. uncheck Air Terminal tags. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. then press F9. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. As you assign diffusers to systems. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. 10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. Thus. and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. after you placed the diffusers. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 .5 Click OK twice. and click OK. 9 If the System Browser title says Zones. So. 7 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides window. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.Mech view. right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems. if all system components are assigned. If the System Browser does not respond. enter ZR. click in the drawing area to make it active. click System Browser. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. 6 Type VG on the keyboard. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. This assignment occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 113 .

If desired. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the right of the office door. you add the VAV to this system.8 inch Inlet. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. Modify VAV box parameters 15 Right-click the VAV box. click to place the VAV box. and click Element Properties. Note that the VAV will detect the downstream airflow when connected to diffusers. 114 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . system specific tools display on the Options Bar. This VAV box services only Office 101 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal.TIP Although this view does not contain room tags.Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 . Click OK. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. and press Esc twice. 12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. ■ The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). and select the VAV box. select VAV Unit . You created a system that includes the air terminal. click (Select Equipment for System). click Mechanical Equipment. click (Create Supply Air System). Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 17 Select the Office 101 rectangular diffuser. enter 9 6 for Offset. Next. 18 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. do the following: ■ Under Constraints. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

select an air terminal that you added to the system. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. Create the ductwork 20 With the new system selected. They remain assign to their respective default systems. and click Select to select the system. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. The organization is from upstream. The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. This display indicates that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. and select the system. and cleared from the Options Bar. place the cursor over the Office 101 air terminal and press Tab. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 115 . This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). the VAV (the parent) to downstream. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar.Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air.

do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 24 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. ■ Click (Next Solution). 28 Click OK.The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. Verify that 6' 0" is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type.Round for Flex Duct Type. For more information. select Main. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. 26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. 116 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 21 On the Options Bar. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select Branch. 25 Under System Type: Supply Air. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 Under System Type: Supply Air. click Finish Layout. refer to Help. click Settings. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. do the following: 22 ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. and select solution 2. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Notice that Solutions is selected. Enter 9' 6" for Offset.

For example. thus it is not part of the system. TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. On the View Control Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 117 . as was the elbow itself. Check duct connectivity 31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. select Coarse detail level for single line. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. For example. and press Tab twice. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Change the geometry display 30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. select Medium for Detail Level. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added.The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. you can delete ductwork and the system remains.

The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 33 On the Options Bar. then you know that a disconnection exists. and click to select them. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Size the duct 32 Place the cursor over the duct. ■ The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . 34 In the Duct Sizing dialog.08 in-wg/100ft. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. fittings. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. The first time you press Tab. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Verify that Only is selected. and enter . IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. click Sizing. Click OK. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Rerouting usually correct this issue. If the entire network does not highlight. and equipment. under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. 118 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab.

double-click the second VAV box listed. 36 Click Cancel. 39 In the Type Selector. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select VAV Unit . 40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door. click to place the VAV box. 38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. the required airflow for the space and the airflow assigned to the diffusers. enter ZR. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 37 Click in the drawing area. 41 In the left column of the System Browser.IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. and click Element Properties. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. 35 With the VAV selected. Note that the airflow is set to 250 CFM . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 119 . press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . click Mechanical Equipment. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air.8 inch Inlet. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the offices immediately below Office 101). It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. right-click and select Element Properties.

The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. 43 Select the Office 102 rectangular diffuser. The component highlights in the drawing area. TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. NOTE After you select a system component. 46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. This system includes the selected system component(s). 42 In the Element Properties dialog. a new system is immediately created. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. 45 Click (Edit System). right-click. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. and click Select from the context menu. under Constraints. 120 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. If not. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. and click OK. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. click Add To System. system equipment. right-click the component in the left column. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. 44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. and number of elements in the active being edited. enter 9' 6" for Offset. 47 Place the cursor over the Office 103 rectangular diffuser.

On the Options Bar. the number of elements has increased to 2. 49 Select the Office 103 rectangular diffuser.48 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 121 . 52 Select the VAV box. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. click (Select Equipment). Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. 50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar.

54 Place your cursor over the Office 102 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. 53 On the Edit System toolbar. 122 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The system displays in red.On the Options Bar. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. If you leave the mouse stationary. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. click Finish. 55 Click to select the system.

click Layout Path.Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 56 On the Options Bar. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 123 . and select solution 3. 58 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Finish Layout. 57 On the Options Bar. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. 59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system.The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. If a warning occurs. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. and after the end point snap displays. 124 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Add an endcap 60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102. click to place the endcap. you can review it and take action if necessary. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. This was the reason for the warning message. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. IMPORTANT When creating layouts. 62 In the Type Selector. So. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. You can either relocate the VAV box. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. or modify the duct manually. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. 61 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. 63 Move the cursor over the end of the main. click Duct Fitting. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created.

under Sizing Method. Verify that Only is selected. 64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Size the duct 67 Place the cursor over the duct. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 125 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. and click to select them. 66 Click Cancel. right-click and select Element Properties. 68 On the Options Bar. 69 In the Duct Sizing dialog.Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. and enter .08 in-wg/100ft. click Sizing. 65 With the VAV selected. Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM. Under Constraints. Click OK. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals.

air terminals. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. The VAV box. 126 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 102 and 103 is sized using the Friction method at . and press Tab twice. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Check duct connectivity 70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

However. 73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 127 .8 inch Inlet. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 72 In the 1 . 74 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Mech view. and click to place the VAV box. 75 In the Type Selector.Next. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . select VAV Unit. click Mechanical Equipment. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). 76 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 71 Right-click in the drawing area.

You will add this later. 78 Select the VAV.77 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV. enter 9' 6" for Offset. and click again to deselect the VAV. click (Create Air Supply System). under Constraints. click (Element Properties). 128 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 79 In the Element Properties dialog. 81 On the Options Bar. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. 80 While pressing CTRL. The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled). The new supply air system displays in red. and on the Options Bar.

Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. and press TAB once to highlight the system. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 82 On the Options Bar. 83 Select the VAV to add it to the system. Next. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 84 With the system selected. 85 On the Options Bar.The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. and select solution 1. click (Select Equipment for System). click Layout Path on the Options Bar. click Modify. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. You have logically connected the air system components. ■ 86 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. and the red system display cleared. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 129 . Then. click to select the system. Click .

After you select the branch. 89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch. notice that drag controls display. 90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.87 In the drawing area. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. click Finish Layout. 88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. 130 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . select the left section of the branch. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. and then snap and move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV.

Next. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. VAV. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 131 . Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. Then. mechanical equipment. click Finish. select a system component that is already part of a system. 96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. The system components are now physically connected. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. the Number of Elements increased to 5. click Add to System. A change has occurred in the air system design. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. 95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. The new system component is now part of the same system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. 93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. Notice that on the Options Bar. 94 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. This number verifies the added diffuser. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. and (Edit) on the Options Bar. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 91 Select the main duct.The ductwork is created.

100 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 101 On the Options Bar. and press Tab twice. select the flex duct and the transition on the diffuser. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 98 With the duct work selected. The new ductwork is created. Now that the duct work is in place. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. 99 Zoom out the view. ■ 102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. right-click and select Delete to remove the unwanted duct work. click Finish Layout. and select solution 1. Click . you need to check that all the parts are connected.97 While pressing CTRL. 132 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and working from the end of the main. Check duct connectivity 103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.

and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Verify that Only is selected. click Sizing. 106 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and click to select them. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 133 .08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints. The selection displays in red. under Sizing Method. Size the duct 104 Place the cursor over the main duct. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout. Click OK. and enter . 105 On the Options Bar. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity.

Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Reposition and rotate if necessary. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. or reinsert duct fittings.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at 0. 108 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. modify the duct manually. If you receive errors. Select and modify a Network layout path solution.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset.This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . modify the layout.Mech floor plan to make it the active view.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. under Mechanical. You can either relocate the VAV box. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. see the note below. see the note below. If you receive errors.) 107 In the Project Browser. double-click 1 . ■ ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. Do not change the duct conversion settings. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. Verify that all Other options are cleared. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. 134 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . So. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. Optional: Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems (See the next exercise for a completed drawing. Next.

specify the air terminal airflow. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 10' 0" and the Detail Level to Medium.Mech mechanical floor plan view. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 135 . Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. For VAV airflow. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. Optional: Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 109 Use the 2 . specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. 110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window. Size the duct using the Friction method at 0. see the note above. Next. see the note above. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. If you receive errors. Do not change the duct conversion settings.The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. Reposition and rotate if necessary. If you receive errors. Verify that all Other options are cleared. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . turn off Air Terminal tags. Select and modify a Network layout path solution.

sized the ductwork.The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Although you already checked duct connectivity. click File menu ➤ Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. checked duct connectivity. 136 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Mech to make it the active view. In this exercise. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. and double-click 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also specified VAV airflow. 113 In the Save As dialog. After creating each system. navigate to the folder of your choice. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. 1 In the Project Browser. and validated the systems in the System Browser. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. Open the i Using Views for Duct Validation. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. and click Save. 112 If you want to save your work. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. In the next exercise.

Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 137 . 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 103. and click Zoom to Fit. 6 In the Project Browser. After you add the section. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. The section relocates under HVAC. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. and click OK. and click Properties. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end point. The selected section displays in red. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. click the section. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. and the second click specifies the section tail. The first click specifies the section head. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. click Section. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. under Graphics. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. right-click Section 1. enter ZR. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. 8 In the drawing area.

and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. 138 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. click Modify. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. The section head displays in blue. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and 103. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. select Medium for Detail Level. 10 On the Design Bar. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 12 On the View Control Bar.

and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 139 . under Extents. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. and click OK. and click View Properties. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 18 On the View Control Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. Notice that in the 3D view. click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. A section box displays around the building model.14 Continue to validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. select Section Box.

TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing.NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. click File menu ➤ Save. 22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. 102. and 103 duct geometry is as you expected. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. 26 If you want to save your work. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 21 In the drawing area. 24 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that you can verify that the Office 101. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. 25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. 140 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. and click Save. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 141 . In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. and click to specify the start point.27 In the Save As dialog. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser.Mech to make it the active view. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. select Round Duct : Taps. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ ■ ■ Verify that 12" is selected for diameter (D:).rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. 4 In the Type Selector. click Duct. Open the i Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. 2 Enter ZR. click the Training Files icon. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. navigate to the folder of your choice. do the following.

and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101. you can select individual segments and use the arrow keys to adjust location. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 8 Enter ZR.7 Draw duct as shown in the following image. 9 Click on the VAV. and click Draw Duct. After placing the duct. right-click on the air connection. 142 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. 11 Draw the first duct segment 2' 0" to the right.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. When drawing duct. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 8" VAV primary connector diameter. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. and click or press Enter to specify the end point. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 143 . 10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. TIP When drawing duct. 12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 8' 0" vertical second duct segment. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. If you pause briefly. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. and click to specify the end point. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object.

the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the primary is complete. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. 144 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102.13 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. After you click to specify the end point. 14 With the Draw tool open.

TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection. 16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. Check connectivity 19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. 18 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. 17 Connect the other three VAVs to the primary duct as shown. zoom the view to the right of the primary. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. On the View Control Bar. click to specify the start point. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 145 . and after the connector snap displays.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. 20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. specify a 9' 6" offset. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. Do not size the primary. 22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. On the Options Bar. you will do that in a later exercise. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. You will size the primary in a later exercise. but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. Check connectivity. ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. Finally. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion.) 21 In the Project Browser. and Angle is cleared. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. 146 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Optional: Complete the level 1 primary duct (See next exercise for a completed drawing. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry.

The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. On the Options Bar. Do not size the primary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2 . Optional: Draw the level 2 primary duct 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. specify a 9' 6" offset. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". and Angle is cleared. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation.Mech to make it the active view. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Check connectivity. You will size the primary in a later exercise. ■ ■ Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 147 .

Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. While drawing duct. click File menu ➤ Save. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. click the Training Files icon. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. but you have yet to size the primary. 148 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . In the next exercise. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. and click Save. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. However. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This determines the airflow direction. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. Open the i Duct Sizing . In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice.Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. In this exercise. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. Before sizing the primary. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. 26 In the Save As dialog. 25 If you want to save your work.

you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 149 . This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. click Duct Fitting. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 1 .Mech to make it the active view. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. click to place the endcap. and after the end point snap displays. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and 116. right-click the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. and click Mechanical. 4 In the Type Selector.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity.Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. and click to select it. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. under Sizing Method. The selected primary displays in red. Verify that Only is selected. Under Constraints. and enter 2500 FPM. click Sizing. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. ■ 150 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog.

you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct.The sized left primary is shown below. So. and press TAB twice. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. You can either relocate the VAV box. modify the duct manually. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. or reinsert duct fittings. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. modify the layout. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 151 . Next.

18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. 152 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit.Mech to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. As in level 1. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run.13 Using the process that you just learned. 14 Using the method you have learned.) 15 In the Project Browser. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. and double-click 2 . check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run (See the next exercise for a completed dawing. The sized right primary is shown below.

20 In the Save As dialog. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. you sized the primary duct for the building.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Rename. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. navigate to the folder of your choice. Then.The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. and click Save. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. enter Duct Sizing . In the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. 19 If you want to save your work. 3 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Copy of 1 . you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. right-click 1 .Mech. 2 In the Project Browser. First. and click OK. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. enter 1 . you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Like room color scheme. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 153 .Mech is created and becomes the active view. Open the i Duct Color Scheme. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon.Velocity Training for File name. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser.Mech Duct Classes for Name.Mech. you assign a color fill to the ductwork.

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical. 5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 2000 FPM. In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter high velocity for the second row. In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

154 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Click OK.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. Using the same color scheme allows you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 155

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder. TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

156 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show. The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. 5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Split).

7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main about 11' 0" from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 157

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:
■ ■

Select Equal Friction, and enter 0.08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

158 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag. TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First, you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 159

sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select

(Inspect).

The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

160 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected to this system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment.

Inspecting Air Systems | 161

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units
In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units.

162 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view 1 Click the View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 2 Select Roof and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Roof. 4 Right-click Roof, and click Rename. 5 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK. 6 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Ignore the warning about the name changing. 7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK twice. 10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe. 11 Set the Detail Level to Medium. This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 13 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 14 In the Type Selector, select Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 163

15 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 16 Place the unit in the approximate location shown below.

17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. Create a new section view 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 20 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 203 VAV box, and click to specify the section start point.

21 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

164 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 24 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 25 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 26 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 27 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. You may need to adjust the top border to see all of the AC unit.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 165

29 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must relocate it.

30 Select the AC unit, and click

(Move) on the Edit toolbar.

31 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.

32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface, (1' 0" directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

166 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 1' 0" which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. Place the level 1 AC unit 33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):

Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 167

Completing the Supply Air Systems
In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make the view active. 2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it displays as shown below.

168 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 6 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 7 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 9 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 10 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection, the connector snap displays.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 169

11 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 12 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Enter 68" for W: (width), and 20" for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -2 6 for Offset, and press Tab.

■ ■

The -2' 6" offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 9' 6". Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 3' 6" and press Enter to specify the end point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 9' 6" from level 2, and then the duct continues horizontally for 3' 6".

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 14 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

170 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

16 Close the Roof Mech view. You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 17 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 18 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 171

19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining elbow. The selected items display in red. 21 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 23 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps. 24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter), select 9". Verify that Auto connect is selected. For Offset, verify that 9' 6" is specified.

25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the start point.

172 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

and after the centerline snap displays. 28 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. click to specify the end point. 27 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 173 .26 Move the cursor over the primary. The left primary is connected to the AC unit.

you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.Next. 29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. 31 Select the right primary duct. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. 174 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 32 Drag the connector down and to the right. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement.Mech view. and place the cursor over the end connector. 30 In the 2 .

34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint.33 Select the right primary duct. 35 With the draw tool still active. 36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 175 . right-click and select Draw Duct. 37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. draw a horizontal run and connect it to the midpoint snap of the riser .

Mech view. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. 41 In the Type Selector. 176 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. zoom in on the duct riser.You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. However. Check connectivity 38 In the 2 .Mech view. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. click Duct Fitting. 40 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. Add endcaps 39 In the 2 .

click to add the endcap. 44 In the Type Selector. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 177 . 43 With the Duct Fitting tool open.Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement.. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. 42 Place your cursor over the top edge. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement.

and then validate its geometry.45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. Verify endcap placement 47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. 178 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click to add the endcap. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. 46 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 49 Using the 2 views. 48 In the 3D view. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. verify the duct riser endcap. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap.

Next. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. 52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.50 Press Tab to check connectivity. click Check None. 51 With the 2 views tiled. 53 On the Options Bar. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. and click OK. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of Completing the Supply Air Systems | 179 . 54 In the Filter dialog. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. Create the high pressure supply air system. click in the 2 . You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork.Mech view to make it active. and then select Mechanical Equipment.

55 On the Options Bar.the current view are selected. all system components must be logically connected by a system. You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. 57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active. However. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. 56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. and select the level 2 AC unit.Mech view range. In this case. click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the selected VAV boxes to it. 180 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . or even without ductwork. 58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork.

After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. 69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. Next. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. 68 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. The System Inspector tool opens. and click Inspect. 67 Click a blank space in the 2 . This is the system that you just created.Validate the primary supply air system 59 Press F9 to open the System Browser. and click Select. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed. expand Mechanical. Inspect the primary supply air system 64 In the System Browser. In the Unassigned folder. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. 65 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Supply Air. 63 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. 66 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. 62 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 25 to view the VAV boxes. 60 In the System Browser. click Inspect.Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 25 system listing.Mech drawing area to make the view active. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. you inspect the system. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 181 . 61 Expand Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . duct fitting. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. diffuser. The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. click Inspect. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child).

click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air system 72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. 71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. Specify the offset to -14' 6". draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 68" width. and enter 3' 6". 182 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view. and a 20" height.70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. ■ ■ This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. Click the supply connector. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. 9' 6". move the cursor down. Next. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 183 . ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. ■ ■ Connect the primary to the AC. release the mouse button. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. and tile it to the left of the 3D view. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge.Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view.Mech view. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. Instead of drawing duct.Mech view (if open). and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. Watch for the centerline snap as shown. and after the edge highlights. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . select the left primary duct segment. In the 1 . open the 1 .Mech view.

and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view. ■ ■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system.The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. ■ 184 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and remember to zoom the view.Mech view. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. Use Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. ■ In the 1 . add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. Validate the system using the System Browser. and inspect the system with the System Inspector.

you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. In this exercise. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. and quickly target those systems that need attention. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 73 If you want to save your work. and for duct sizing.The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. As you view the warnings. click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Air Systems. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. 74 In the Save As dialog. Using tiled windows. In the next exercise. you check the systems in your project. you need to validate them. and validated these logical connections. navigate to the folder of your choice. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In this exercise. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. Revit MEP lists the system components Checking Air Systems | 185 . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. click Check Duct Systems.

This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. 186 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . For example. the duct is now associated with that system. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. thus assigning the components to a system. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. However. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. Then. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. So. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system.that are associated with each warning. After you assign the system components to a system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. and for duct sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. as a tutorial exercise. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. In the System Browser. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes.

8 Right-click Supply Air. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. Depending on your air systems design. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. In this exercise. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 6 Using the same methods. TIP If you have multiple views open. You now confirm the systems that you created. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. otherwise click Close. click File menu ➤ Save. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. and click Save. 9 Right-click a system. 10 If you want to save your work. 11 In the Save As dialog. and click Select to view it and its assigned system components. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. navigate to the folder of your choice. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment.The red lines represent the default logical connection. Checking Air Systems | 187 . In the next lesson. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems.

188 .

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. a boiler. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. and the systems to logically connect the system components. right-click 2 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click the Training Files icon. placing a circulator pump. After completing the air systems lesson.Mechanical Systems: Piping 5 Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems.Mech is created and becomes the active view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. pipes. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. First.Mech. and inspecting the piping system. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you create hydronic piping systems. 189 . designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. In this lesson. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. you create new views in which to design the piping system. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. circulator pump. Then. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. A new view called Copy of 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the i Creating Piping Views.

3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.Piping for Name. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . scroll down to the Extents category. for Level. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. you change the view range. right-click Copy of 2 .Piping view selected in the Project Browser. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and enter -11 6 for Offset.2 In the Project Browser. For example. Under View Depth. you do not need to type measurement symbols. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. under Graphics. Enter -3 1 for Cut plane Offset. and click Edit for View Range. The 2 .Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. 7 In the View Range dialog. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. just separate the value with a space. For Bottom. Also notice that 2 . TIP When entering a value. enter 2 . and enter -11' 6" for Offset. 8 Click OK twice. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". and click Rename. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. and enter 1' 0" for Offset.Mech. 190 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Next. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. click view properties. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected.

These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. So. click in the drawing area to make the view active. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. they will not filter all system elements needed.Piping view. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. 15 Under Filter Rules. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. and verify that equals is selected. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. However. under Filters. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. type name. 10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. and click OK. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. 14 Under Categories. Considering this. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. However. (New). however. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. or even a description that you define. click the Filters tab. and enter VG. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. you can add and activate filters. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria.You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. On the Filters tab. To do this. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. Click Apply. such as family name. Create and define filters 9 In the 2 . common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. 11 Click Edit/New. Select VAV Unit . you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. Verify that none is selected for And. the system filters are not used. In this lesson. it will be best to create filters. Next. click 13 Enter VAV Boxes for Name.Parallel Fan Powered for the family name. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. system type. you need a define common filter criteria. Creating Piping Views | 191 . You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. Depending on the filter criteria. select Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Filters dialog. you may want to select each component type separately. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals.

if differences exist in the selected elements. 28 Under Identity Data. and verify that equals is selected. Because you already entered the description. 30 Click OK twice.16 In the Filters dialog. 19 Under Filter Rules. select Supply Diffuser . This is because the selected supply. By selecting each air terminal type separately. 31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. This action adds a description for all Exhaust Diffuser air terminals. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Enter Air Terminal for the description. then the type parameters will not display. you can select it. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. otherwise the filter will not work. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. return. and select Air Terminal. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. click (Properties). under Filters. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. and click Apply. 192 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click Air Terminals. select Description for Filter by. select Exhaust Diffuser Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. you continue to create and define the filters. So. 21 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you must spell both verbatim.Hosted. For Type. return. Remember.Piping view to make it active. 26 Click Apply. Next. 23 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. click Air Terminal. and click OK. you will not see the Description type parameter. under Identity Data. This is the same rule for using formulae. 22 In the Type Selector. Remember to click Apply. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. . click in the Value column for Description. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. 29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers. click 17 Enter Air Terminals for Name. select Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. 32 Click in the 2 . 25 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Under Categories. click Edit/New. and enter VG. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. Next. Next. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. enter Air Terminal for Description. you create a description as the common filter criteria.

To filter multiple duct fitting types. Filter by: Family Name. Category: Flex Ducts. you specify a family and a type name. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Filter by: Family Name. This is because you have not added them. Category: Ducts. verify that equals is selected. Filter by: Family Name. Next. 40 Click OK twice. verify that equals is selected. Category: Ducts. you need a common filter criteria. If you did not click Apply. And: Type Name. you need to define the filter again. clear all check boxes except for Mechanical . Flex Ducts .33 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. you have 2 types of rectangular duct.Supply and Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. 36 Click OK. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. verify that equals is selected. click the Filters tab. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . So. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. verify that equals is selected.Duct Fittings. So. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. and click OK. Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. 35 Using the methods that you just learned. create the following new filters according to the specifications. you activate the filters. and select Round Duct for the family name. and enter Supply Air for system type name. you filter duct fittings by system type. You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. And: Type Name. Filter by: Family Name. verify that equals is selected. Creating Piping Views | 193 . You used this duct to create the duct riser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. Next. verify that equals is selected. Filter by: System Type. Category: Ducts. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. Round Ducts. click Edit/New. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. verify that equals is selected. you add and activate the filters. Add and activate filters 37 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.Round. 39 Under Visibility. click Add. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. Category: Duct Fittings. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. 34 On the Filters tab. 38 In the Add Filters dialog. Next. select all of the filters that you created. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name.

Mech. and click View Properties. you change the view range. and click OK. scroll down to the Extents category. Next.All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 In the View Range dialog. right-click Copy of 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 43 Enter 1 . TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. and click Edit for View Range. Unlike the 2 . right-click 1 .Piping for Name. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 10' 0" is specified for Top Offset. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. and click Rename.Piping view displays the new view settings. Create the level 1 piping view 41 In the Project Browser. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level.Mech is created and becomes the active view. You now define the view properties. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. 48 Click OK twice.Piping view. under Graphics. under Primary Range. 42 In the Project Browser.Mech. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. 44 Right-click in the drawing area. The 10 foot top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except 194 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The 1 . A new view called Copy of 1 . you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. Next.

you will be unable to view the duct riser. and click OK. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. 58 Click OK. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. select all of the filters that you created. 55 On the Filters tab. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. If you turn off ducts visibility.for the boiler pipe connection). 56 In the Add Filters dialog. clear Section Box to turn it off. As you create the pipe runs. ducts. Create the 3D Piping view 49 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and to create the level 1 piping system. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. Next. 52 Right-click in the drawing area. 50 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you will want to validate the geometry. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. and click View Properties. 51 Enter 3D Piping for Name. such as halftone architecture. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. 57 Under Visibility. and click Rename. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. right-click 3D. Creating Piping Views | 195 . You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. You used this duct to create the duct riser. under Extents. 59 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Filters tab.

2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. In the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.Piping to make it the active view. navigate to the folder of your choice.60 Click OK. 5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. click Mechanical Equipment. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. and click Save. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click 2 . select Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : 1" NPT. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. Open the i Placing Radiators and Boiler. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. you place the radiators and a boiler. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. You also created filters to display certain system components. and click Piping. 6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. 62 In the Save As dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 196 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. click the Training Files icon. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. right-click the Design Bar. 61 If you want to save your work. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view.

Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 197 . select it and use the arrow keys to move it into position. To place the radiator precisely under the window. except for the windows on the radius wall. and notice that the connectors display.7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. 8 Click to place the radiator. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown.

Next. drag the section tail. and you do not want to include it. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. double-click 1 . Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 4 GPM for all fin-tube radiators in the building. 14 Enter 4 for Flow. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. and click Select All Instances. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. right-click a radiator. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. Next. you modify the radiator flow rate. If the same type of component exists on another level. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed.Piping to make this the active view. then these are different across the selected objects. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. you place the boiler. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. If parameters are blank. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. All level 2 radiators display in red. 12 On the Options Bar. If so. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. 198 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . under Mechanical Loads. click (Element Properties). for Flow.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. and click OK. verify that 20 GPM is specified for all of the selected radiators. 13 In the resulting dialog.

click Mechanical Equipment. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool.16 Enter ZR. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 199 . and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. Next. you verify the boiler flow rate. and select Boiler : Standard from the Type Selector. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. watch the listening dimensions. Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler. and click to place the boiler approximately as shown. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar.

TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. click in the drawing area to make it active.20 In the drawing area. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and click Element Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save. After creating the logical connection. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. In this exercise. 200 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. and then create the logical connection between these system components. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. under Type Parameters. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. 23 If you want to save your work. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. then press F9. you create the supply and return piping systems. click the Training Files icon. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. Unlike logical connections (systems). If the System Browser does not respond. click System Browser. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name.Piping to make it the active view. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. 24 In the Save As dialog. right-click the boiler. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Click OK. verify that 230 GPM is set for Max Flow. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. During this exercise. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. Open the i Creating Piping Systems. analyses cannot be performed. and double-click 2 .

right-click. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. click it to the supply system. 6 On the Options Bar. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. (Select Equipment for System). Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. 7 On the Options Bar. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. and click Select All Instances. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. As you assign radiators to systems. if all system components are assigned. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Notice that after you click . So. and select the boiler to assign Creating the Piping Systems | 201 . click (Create Hydronic Supply System). and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. All level 2 radiators display in red. after you placed the radiators and boiler. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Thus.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and click Select to select the system.TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. Next. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. 202 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Notice that you can select only valid system components. press Tab. Thus. all other components are unavailable. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. you create the return piping system. The organization is from upstream. This display indicates that the new system is selected. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. and select the system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. the boiler (the parent) to downstream.

and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. So. 11 The return system displays in red. right-click. 10 On the Options Bar. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. and cleared from the Options Bar. These listings represent the systems that you just created. Creating the Piping Systems | 203 .Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. and select the boiler to assign TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. 9 On the Options Bar. click it to the return system. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. (Select Equipment for System). select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. expand Piping. 13 Right-click each category. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators.

enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. 17 If you want to save your work. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. 204 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. In a later exercise. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. navigate to the folder of your choice. Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. or even without pipe being drawn. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. in the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. In this exercise.Piping to make it the active view. and double-click 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. and click Select. 18 In the Save As dialog. click the Training Files icon.15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. Open the i Creating Pipe Runs.

The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). Creating Pipe Runs | 205 .Notice that all components that are in the 2 . 3 On the Options Bar. Then. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. Notice that the radiators. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Filter dialog. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. click Layout Path. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. click Check None. the return system that logically connects the components display in red.Piping view range highlight. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. you can place the cursor over a radiator. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components.Piping view). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. and then select Mechanical Equipment. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. the boiler. and click OK.

then the Select a System dialog will open. ■ Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. 8 On the Options Bar. ■ 206 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . It does not reference the architecture. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. and select solution 4 of 4. Enter 1 0 for Inset. The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. 6 In the Select a System dialog. ■ Click (Next Solution). 7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. You will need to select a system to create the layout.IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). The system displays in red. verify that Solutions is selected. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK.

Creating Pipe Runs | 207 . you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. Enter -1 3 for Offset. 11 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. click Settings. you now modify the layout path. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. refer to Help. or architecture. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. and other obstacles. verify that Main is selected. For more information. Enter -1' 3" for Offset. you create the supply pipe run 1 foot from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). duct. Later in this exercise. 13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. structural beams. 12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Next.The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 9 On the Options Bar. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. 10 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Branch. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. Using this inset. 14 Click OK. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 10' 9" in the level 1 plenum space. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes.

A drag control displays. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall.Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 15 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout path. zoom the view. 17 Using the drag control. The layout path is located under the radiators. 208 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 16 In the drawing area. click Modify.

click Finish Layout. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line.18 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings Creating Pipe Runs | 209 .

For example. Either relocate the system components. 210 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. and is not part of the system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. Change the geometry display 20 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 201. or manually modify the pipe.are automatically inserted. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected.

If a pipe is hidden by an object. 21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). 22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system.Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. To turn off hidden lines. select Fine for Detail Level. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. Creating Pipe Runs | 211 . This is caused by the hidden line setting. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar.

TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. 212 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Next. Instead of moving the pipe. The design requires 2 zones. On the View Control Bar. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. and click to select them. 25 Press Delete to delete the selection. 24 Place the cursor over the pipe. Additionally. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. So. Medium for 2-line duct display. select Coarse for single line display. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 1 inch diameter. Modify the pipe run 23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. or Fine for 2-line pipe display.

width. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. 26 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. the logical connection (or system) is still intact. 27 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). 30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. If the pipes had different diameters. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The diameter of the main and branches change to 1 inch. and click Modify on the Design Bar.Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. you modify the supply pipe run diameter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. select 1" for D: (diameter). Next. and click to select it. 29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. 28 On the Options Bar. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 1" indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. the diameter Creating Pipe Runs | 213 .

fittings. press Tab 3 times. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. Check connectivity 31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. 32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights.would not display. 214 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and equipment. then you know that a disconnect exists. Next. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. If the entire network does not highlight. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. The first time you press Tab. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.

create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system.Piping view. and enter -1' 9" for both the main and branch offsets. For pipe conversion settings. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. Create the level 2 return pipe run 34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Creating Pipe Runs | 215 . Select Perimeter solution 4. Enter 2' 0" for Inset. Next. This places the pipes at a 10' 3" elevation in the level 1 plenum space. you can click to select them. 33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. you create the return pipe run. This allows you to better see disconnects.

Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 1". 35 If you want to save your work. click File menu ➤ Save. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. 36 In the Save As dialog. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. Remember. and click Save. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. 216 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. navigate to the folder of your choice.■ In the Layout Path tool. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view.

You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In the next exercise. converted fittings. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design.Piping to make it the active view. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs.In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. You checked connectivity. Resolving Pipe Interference | 217 . corrected disconnects. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. In this exercise. and double-click 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the i Resolving Pipe Interference.

Adding a section view is a 2-click process.Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. The first click specifies the section head. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the section head location. click Section. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. and the second click specifies the section tail. click Zoom in Region. 5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. After you add the section. 218 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view.

7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.A new section view named Section 3 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. Resolving Pipe Interference | 219 . 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell. NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above.

All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 220 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 3 view. right-click Section 3. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 8 In the Project Browser. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. select Piping for Sub Discipline. and click OK.The section head and tail display. select Fine for Detail Level. The section relocates under Piping. and click Properties. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. under Graphics. 11 On the View Control Bar.

16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. mechanical equipment placement. Next. and other aspects of your systems design. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. These connectors connect to the tee fittings. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. place the cursor over the top connector.Piping to make it the active view. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. and after the connectors display. Resolving Pipe Interference | 221 .

22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. release the mouse button to reconnect it. and click to split the pipe approximately as shown. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. 222 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. always connect to pipe segments. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. click (Split). and select the return pipe segment again. If you split the pipe. Next. you split the supply pipe segment. 19 Zoom out. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to the area outside the stairwell as shown. fittings. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. 21 On the Edit toolbar. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. NOTE When modifying pipe.18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. and after the fitting end point snap displays.

and draw the pipe around the stairs. Zoom out the view. 26 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. Resolving Pipe Interference | 223 . This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. and press Delete to delete it. 25 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. Next.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. 24 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. you convert a tee fitting. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting.

30 Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. right-click and select Delete. and then select the two adjacent pipes to add an elbow. and move the cursor to the left. 28 Select Trim. The new tee has a horizontal. 29 Select the elbow and click on the upper plus (+) sign to convert the elbow to a tee. and then click Modify. not vertical. On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 33 Zoom out the view.27 Select the tee. 224 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. orientation. 32 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. 31 In the Type Selector. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. and after the end point connector snap displays. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment.

click to specify the segment end point. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. Resolving Pipe Interference | 225 . and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. NOTE When drawing pipe. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing.34 Draw the pipe 12’ 0" to the left outside the stairwell. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. and after the connector snap displays. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. 35 Draw the pipe down. 36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right.

39 Right-click the lower connector. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.The return pipe run is connected as shown. 37 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. 38 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. 226 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

Resolving Pipe Interference | 227 . NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. The section displays in red. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. or width and height. If necessary. the pipe diameter. 41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. 43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 42 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). However. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector.This activates the Draw tool. The amount of movement that these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor. 40 In the Type Selector.

228 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 50 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. 46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. 48 Zoom in on the stairwell. 51 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 5' 0" from its left connector. you may get a false positive result. click (Split). 49 On the Edit toolbar. 47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 .Piping to make it the active view. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. 45 On the View Control Bar. select Fine for Detail Level.Although this section was used for air systems. 44 Press ESC. 52 Using the methods that you learned. watch the listening dimensions. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. Otherwise. and double-click the section head to open the section view. and split the supply pipe at 12' 0" from its left connector.

using the methods that you learned. 53 Again. Resolving Pipe Interference | 229 . Remember to watch for connector snaps.You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown.

Then. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. In the left pane of the Open dialog. preferably a connector snap. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. click the Training Files icon. 55 If you want to save your work. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. you used the Split. 1 In the Project Browser. (2) Connect to a snap. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. and offset are automatically specified. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. Remember that after you create pipe. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the start point. diameter (or width and height). you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. 56 In the Save As dialog. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.54 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. In the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. Open the i Connecting Boiler. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. the pipe type is also matched. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool.rvtfile located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 230 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Using Create Similar. Draw. Using these 2 methods. and click Save.

7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. Connecting the Boiler | 231 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Piping to make it the active view. and double-click 2 . the active view is the only open window. TIP When tiling 2 views. the active view is tiled to the left. You will design in the 2 . You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. 3 In the Project Browser.Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. Note that if this option is unavailable. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows.

verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. click Pipe. 10 In the Type Selector. watch the listening dimensions. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar.8 Zoom in on the boiler. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at approximately 1' 6" from the boiler connection. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 7 feet from level 1. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. Enter -5 0 for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the left. and after the connector snap displays. 232 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. TIP When drawing pipe. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). after listening dimensions display. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. 16 On the Options Bar. enter -1 3 for Offset.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. In a later exercise. and click to specify the end point.) to separate snap increments. zoom the view and try again. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. Connecting the Boiler | 233 . 15 Draw the pipe up to 3’ 0". 10' 9" from level 1. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar.

release the mouse button to connect to it. and after the connector snap displays. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. click to specify the pipe segment end point. The boiler supply connector pipe is created. 234 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar.17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe.

Connecting the Boiler | 235 . 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run.

27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee. 236 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 24 With the windows tiled. 26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run.Next. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler.

and the start point is automatically specified. Verify that -5' 0" is specified for Offset. and after listening dimensions display. Connecting the Boiler | 237 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 29 Click in the 2 . and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.Piping view to make it active. 32 On the Options Bar. 34 Draw the pipe up. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.28 In the 3D Piping view. 31 In the Type Selector. right-click the right connector. 33 Draw the pipe 2' 0" to the right and click to specify the segment end point. The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. 30 Zoom in on the tee. enter 3 0 and press Enter. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. select the tee to display the connectors.

click to specify the end point. you will place a circulator pump on this segment.This creates a 1 foot pipe segment. 38 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 36 With the Draw tool activated. 238 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 35 On the Options Bar. connect the right supply pipe run. In a later exercise. 37 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. enter -1 3 for Offset.

39 Check connectivity. Connecting the Boiler | 239 . 40 Validate the pipe geometry.The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler.

Next.Piping the active view. and click Draw Pipe. 46 On the Options Bar. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -11' -2" from level 2. and that Auto Connect is selected. and the 2 . and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. zoom in on the boiler. and enter 0 4 and press Enter. click the specify the end point. you draw a 6 inch pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. enter -1 9 for Offset. 47 Draw the pipe to the left. 240 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 45 Move the cursor up. 44 On the Options Bar. Optional: Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 41 With the windows tiled. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. This places the return connection 10 inches above level 1. Next. 43 In the Type Selector. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter). 42 Select the boiler. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 10' 3" from level 1. and right-click the return connector.

Connecting the Boiler | 241 .48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. and after the connector snap displays. click to connect to the left return pipe run.

The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. 49 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. 51 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. 242 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and click Draw Pipe. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. 50 Zoom in on the boiler. 52 Select the tee fitting. and click to specify the end point. 53 Draw the pipe 1' 0" to the right. right-click the right connector.

and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.54 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 243 . click to specify the end point.

244 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe.55 Using the method that you learned. 56 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting.

and after highlights. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes.Piping view. If the Tools toolbar is not available. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. Connecting the Boiler | 245 . click to specify the alignment reference point. click (Align). First. 59 With the 2 .Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. 60 On the Tools toolbar. Next. and then you select the point to align. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process.58 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. 61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. in the 2 . Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. select the reference point where you want to align.

246 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. and after the centerline highlights. click to specify the point to align. 62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe.

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 247

The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also are parametrically adjusted. This situation results because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that you aligned.

65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

66 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

248 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 67 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 68 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 249

The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.50 FT/100ft. Select And, and enter 8 FPS for Velocity. Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

250 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 251

Placing Circulator Pumps
In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).

8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 0' 3" from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

252 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector, select In-line Circulator : Standard. 14 Place the cursor between the pipe openings and click to place the circulator pump. 15 Select the pump and click Rotate on the toolbar. 16 Flip the pump so that the motor is on the left. 17 Click Align on the toolbar and select the middle of the pipe above and the middle of the circulator connector. NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 253

18 TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys or the Move tool for precise placement. 19 Press ESC twice. 20 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 22 On the Options Bar, click .

You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -5 0 for Offset. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

254 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

24 Click OK. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC. 25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 27 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 255

28 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity. 29 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB. The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

256 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

31 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 32 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

33 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

34 Click the rotation control on the right.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 257

The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system 36 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser. You can also press F9. 37 In the System Browser, do the following:
■ ■

Expand the Unassigned folder. Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located

258 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. 38 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar. TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar.

39 On the Options Bar, click

(Edit System).

The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 259

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. 42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System. 43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler. System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click

(Inspect).

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

260 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 261

11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

262 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems
Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The piping system is logically and physically valid. However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

Checking Piping Systems | 263

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.

264 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The red lines represent the default logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views, otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the piping system assignments. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All. The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 265

use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. For pipe offset. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. Finally. In this tutorial. 17 In the Save As dialog. specify 9' 9" for the supply and 9' 3" for the return pipe offset elevation. For additional practice. it is a valid system without problems. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. Design the system in the 1 . 3D. the creation and modification methods remained the same. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. In this exercise. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. a boiler. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe 266 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 16 If you want to save your work. In the lesson. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. and click Save. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. Depending on your air systems design. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. circulator pumps. and section views. navigate to the folder of your choice. click File menu ➤ Save. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. 15 Using the methods that you learned. and fin-tube radiators. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems.

Explore different system designs. The completed mechanical systems are included in the i Completed Mechanical Systems. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling).rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2009. parametrically modify those designs.connections and creating logical systems. Checking Piping Systems | 267 . Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents.

268 .

you learn to create electrical systems using a linked architectural model of a building project. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. If the tutorial datasets are not present. After finishing each exercise. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. if the link is lost. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. However. In this tutorial. However.autodesk. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. go to http://www. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Electrical Systems 6 In this tutorial. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. Planning Electrical Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you can choose to save your work. 269 . you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model.rvt. click Reload From. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. and create schedules that you will need to design the electrical systems for your project. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In this lesson you specify electrical settings. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. and select i Office Building.

2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. 3 Click Wiring Types. click the Training Files icon. power. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. click Add (below the table). Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Electrical Views. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For example. in the left pane. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. and in the right pane. distribution systems. the Limit Offset. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. and demand factors that you will use in your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views. expand Wiring. has been set to 10' 6" for the building used with these exercises. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. power distribution systems. then applying the appropriate template to each plan: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. wiring. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. Later. in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces. For this reason.rvt. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design.The electrical settings determine the voltages. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Lighting. wiring. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Insulation Max Size Value CU-THWN Copper 75 THWN 500 270 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

00V 280.00 V 250.00 V 480.00 V 240.00 V 208. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.00V 277.00 V 220.Parameter Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value 1. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V. By specifying a range.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00 V 490. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.00 V 200. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.00 V Maximum 130.00V 260. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.00 V Minimum 110.00 V 460.00 V 220. For example.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 271 . Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 240 277 480 Value 120. click Voltage Definitions.

272 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 120/240 Single 480/277 Wye Phase Three Single Three Configuration Wye None Wye Wires 4 3 4 L-L 208 240 480 L-G 120 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. For example. 8 In the right pane. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. click Distribution Systems. even though this is physically impossible. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.

000VA.000VA 10. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. 9 Click Demand Factors.000VA 3. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. or Other systems in your project based on their load.000VA 10. Preparing the Electrical Plan | 273 . More Than and Less Than values define the range for the associated Demand Factor: ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list.NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. Power. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. 10 Click OK. Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. HVAC. For example. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. at any given time. For this exercise. Red. this type of system (High. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. leave the default settings as shown here. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load.000VA.

208V MLO . distribution systems. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard folder.rfa 18 Using the same method. you can load from the components from that location. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.rfa family. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. 13 Select Lighting Switches.rfa. 14 Using the same method. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). 12 In the Open dialog. and click Open. 274 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . voltages. expand Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Devices. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. In this case the key style is the type of space and. and established the parameters for your wiring. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.NEMA Type 2. A Lighting Devices ➤ Lighting Switches folder. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. and so on).rfa. As you loaded each of the component families. containing several switch types. expand Families.480V MCB .rfa. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer folder. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise. conference rooms. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. and demand factors. Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. restrooms.Surface. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building.480-208Y120 . reopen Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. An Electrical Fixtures ➤ Duplex Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. and load Dry Type Transformer . 15 Click Open. Later. As an alternative. selected components for your electrical systems.rfa Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and load Duplex Receptacle. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. 19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the Troffer Corner Insert. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. and load the following families: ■ ■ Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Load component families 11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Imperial Library to the i families sub-folder. Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 274. 17 Using the same method.Surface. in the Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of spaces (offices. has also been added under Lighting Device. 16 In the Project Browser.

select Illuminance. and when the cross-hairs display. double-click 1 . click to select the space. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project. For Group. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type.Lighting in the Space Element Properties dialog. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Under Parameter Data. click Add. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Lighting Levels. To verify this. you can look at the properties for one of the spaces. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Select Instance. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical . Defining Required Lighting Levels | 275 .Open the provided dataset. select Electrical-Lighting. move the cursor over the office in the upper-left corner.Lighting to make it the active view. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. 4 Click OK twice. For Type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Discipline. The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project. as described below. Under Categories.rvt. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. select Electrical. select Spaces.

■ ■ ■ The Shedule Properties dialog displays. NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content. However. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each space. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. For Name. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. one for each type of space in the building. 8 Click Cancel. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. In the Element Properties dialog. enter Space Lighting Requirements. there are many spaces in this project that have similar lighting requirements. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the space component. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Spaces for Category. click (Properties). The key schedule displays in the drawing area. Click Schedule keys.Lighting category. The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule. enter Lighting Levels. For Key Name.7 On the Options Bar. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each space type. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. 12 Click OK. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on space type. 276 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical .

click . double-click the 1 . according to the values in the following table: Space Type Private Office Open Office Main Entrance Lounge Restroom Conference Elec/Mech Stair/Circulation Required Lighting Level (fc) 30 45 45 25 30 35 20 20 When completed.Enter a space type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of spaces in the project. 17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays. under Instance Parameters. and click Element Properties.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 277 . click View Properties and. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. 16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. In the Project Browser. scroll down to the Identity Data category. and for Lighting Levels parameter. Assign space keys to the spaces in the project 15 In the Project Browser. in the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. then right-click. right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule. the Key Schedule should looks like this: TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. and select Open Office.

The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Space Lighting Requirements key schedule.Lighting 1 . then open 2 . then right-click one of the selections.Lighting 1 . Office). 21 Using the same method.Lighting and apply Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog.19 Scroll up to the Electrical .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . 20 Click OK. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected spaces.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting. Level 1 .Lighting Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Name Office 101 Office 102 Office 103 Open 104 Mens Room 105 Elec/Mech 106 Ladies Room 107 Office 108 Office 109 Office 110 Office 111 Office 112 Office 113 Stairwell 114 Office 115 Office 116 Office 117 Key Name Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 278 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting 1 . select multiple spaces of the same type (for example. While pressing Ctrl.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in 1 .Lighting 1 . and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 45 fc.Lighting category.Lighting 1 .

Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Lighting 2 . For example.Lighting 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters.Lighting 2 . You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component.Lighting 2 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Close.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . if required.Lighting 2 . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels on page 280.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . you could create a key schedule named Space Variables.Lighting 2 .Level 1 .Lighting Number 121 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Name Main Entrance 121 Office 201 Office 202 Office 203 Open 204 Mens Room 205 Elec/Mech 206 Ladies Room 207 Lounge 208 Office 209 Office 210 Office 211 Office 212 Stairwell 213 Conference Room 214 Office 215 Office 216 Key Name Main Entrance Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish.Lighting 2 . Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values Defining Required Lighting Levels | 279 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project.Lighting 2 .

and click OK to dismiss the alert message. select Spaces. 14 Click OK twice. enter Required Lighting. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the space components. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. select Underline. click Color Scheme Legend. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Color Fills. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Consequently. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. select Spaces for Category. for Name. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click the 1 . 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and click Element Properties. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ (Duplicate). 6 For Color. select Required Lighting 10 Click OK. In this exercise you will create a space color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Space color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document.rvt. selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule.according to space type. select Show Title. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Required Lighting Level. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 280 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 7 Click OK. For Color Scheme. For Space Type. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. Open the provided dataset. for Title. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. as described below. and place it in the drawing. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. enter Required Lighting Levels. and click 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. Under Title Text.

activate the color scheme as you did for 1 . 17 Using the same method. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. Open the provided dataset. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project.16 Make the 2 . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 281 . 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/. 18 You can save the open file if you wish. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for spaces. but only one per view. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project.Lighting floor plan the active view. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).5 fc range specified in the schedule.Lighting. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each space against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you create a space lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. You can have more than one color scheme in the project. as described below. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281.

For Formula. For Discipline. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Schedule Lighting Requirements. enter Lighting Delta. For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Number. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. enter Average Estimated Illumination . click the Training Files icon. For Type. Verify that Ascending is selected. scroll down the Available fields list. 2 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Electrical.Required Lighting Level.rvt. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. select Illuminance. 282 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select Spaces. Click OK. enter Space Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Create space lighting analysis schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane Create a new schedule parameter 4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Calculated Value.

and click Field Format. under fields.8 On the Formatting tab. specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. select Lighting Delta. 17 Using the same method. select 2 decimal places. verify that Fixed is selected. 11 Click the Background Color chip. select Lighting Delta. 13 Click OK twice. 16 Click OK. 12 In the Color dialog. select Not Between. 18 Click OK. click the red color chip. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Field. For Value. For Rounding. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 283 . For Test. enter -5 fc and +5 fc in the text boxes. under Fields. 15 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Ceiling Reflectance. under Basic colors. For Units. 9 Click Conditional Format. 19 You can save the open file if you wish. 14 On the Formatting tab. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. there is no required lighting level specified. As you select and place lighting fixtures. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. and make connections to electrical equipment. Open the provided dataset. and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. Only the Number.5 fc range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. Average Estimated Lighting. 284 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces as 0. Designing the Electrical System on page 284. as described below. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. you will create power and lighting circuits. Designing the Electrical System In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Adding Lighting Fixtures. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Name. these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. As a result. and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. electrical equipment. expand Schedules/Quantities. NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis.rvt. Once the equipment is in place. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces. Place the initial lighting fixture 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.20 Click File menu ➤ Close. This is because the value is not within the +/. the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each space’s lighting requirement. Floor Reflectance. However. NOTE Right-click a heading. and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. and these areas will not be lighted. and double-click Space Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. Adding Lighting Fixtures In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. Wall Reflectance. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid. 11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan. click Close Hidden Windows. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. click Lighting Fixture.4 On the Windows menu.Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. double-click 1 . 9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view.Ceiling Elec view. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 3 Lamp. click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. 8 In the 1 . 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 10 In the Type Selector. under Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Windows menu. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 285 . and arrange the windows as shown. click Tile. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location.

click (Move). 286 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .12 Click Modify. 15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture. 14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture. and on the Toolbar. and when Endpoint displays. and click when Intersection displays. click to specify the start point. select it.

as shown. the Lighting Delta for Office 101 is closer to the required +/. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point.In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 287 . select Multiple. and on the toolbar. and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of level 1.5 fc. Copy and place additional lighting fixtures 16 Select the lighting fixture. click 17 On the Options Bar. (Copy). 18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point.

but is still not within the +/.5 fc range. Point by point analysis is not currently supported. select one of the lighting fixtures in each space. so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these spaces. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 2Lamp. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. and 103 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 30 fc.Check the illumination levels against the Space Lighting Analysis schedule 19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. If you select a component inadvertently. 288 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. To adjust the illumination level downward. 102. you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each space with a 2-lamp fixture.Ceiling Elec. The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. and in the Type Selector. Change lighting fixture type 20 In 1 .

When you are finished. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.Ceiling Elec views. 22 Using the same method. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise.Ceiling Elec and 2 .21 Again. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1 . only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/. Plenum and chase spaces will be blank. placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. and go on to the next exercise. Level 1 NOTE Lighting fixtures were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical spaces. Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 289 .5 fc range. and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.

Level 2 23 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. and click Unhide All Columns. 290 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . right-click one of the headings.

under Instance Parameters. and click to place the switch. 11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown. 5 Using the same method. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise. under Schemes for the Spaces Category. as described below. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. your Lighting Delta column for all of the spaces should be white. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place switches in spaces 6 In the Project Browser. you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans.With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces. 8 In the Type Selector.rvt. click the Training Files icon. 10 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of space 101.Lighting. and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. Turn off the color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Open the provided dataset. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 1 .Lighting to make it the active view. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. Placing Lighting Switches In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. 4 Click OK twice. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Switches. Placing Lighting Switches on page 291. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. Placing Lighting Switches | 291 . turn off the color scheme on level 2. 9 On the Options Bar. click Device. click (none). Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. click in the Value column for Color Scheme. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. 24 You can save the open file if you wish. right-click 1 . and click Properties. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.

292 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click Device.12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 . and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown. and in the Type Selector.Lighting view as shown. 14 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Level 1 13 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. select Lighting Switches : Three Way.

and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. as shown. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown. select Lighting Switches : Four Way. Placing Lighting Switches | 293 . and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office.15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan.

click Device. and in the Type Selector. 294 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 21 On the Design Bar.18 In the open office area. place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.Lighting to make it the active view. 22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown. select Lighting Switches : Three Way. double-click 2 . 20 In the Project Browser. 19 Click Modify.

and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. click Device. and go on to the next exercise. in the Type Selector. 24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise.23 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. Placing Lighting Switches | 295 . as shown. and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown. On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

Power to make it the active view. Hide lighting components and specify view ranges 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Placing Power Receptacles on page 296. Open the provided dataset. and click View Properties. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Placing Power Receptacles In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.rvt.Level 2 25 You can save the open file if you wish. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Receptacles. 296 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 1 . 27 Proceed to the next exercise. as described below. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

15 In the left side of the plan. 8 Click OK twice. under Primary Range. 5 Click OK. and click Properties. scroll down to View Range.3 In the Element Properties dialog.Power plan view. and specify the top of the view range as 10' 0". and click Edit. 4 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. enter 10' 0". click Device. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 7 In the View Range dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. and edit the View Range to select Associated Level (Level 2). Place wall-hosted receptacles 11 In the 1 . Placing Power Receptacles | 297 . scroll down and. click Edit. place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. clear Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. select Associated Level (Level 1). 14 On the Options Bar. right-click 2 . for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. on the Model Categories tab. for Top. under Instance Properties. edit the Visibility/Graphics Overrides for the view to hide lighting fixtures and lighting devices.Power. including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas. under Instance Parameters. and for Offset. 16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown. 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Using the same method.

1-Power 298 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

(Place on Work Plane). click for Plane. The current level is selected by default. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. 21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. double-click 1 .2-Power Place floor-hosted receptacles 17 In the Project Browser. Placing Power Receptacles | 299 . and place a receptacle on the floor as shown. click Device.Power. 19 In the Type Selector.

23 Select the receptacle and click plane (within the space). Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures. (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work 25 On the Options Bar. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right side of the Level 1 open office. its connector is located below the level of the work plane. select Multiple. click (Copy). When placing a receptacle on a work plane. 26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point. 27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles. 24 On the Toolbar.22 Click Modify. as shown. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles. In the next steps. click . as shown. it is important that the connector be within the space to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure. 300 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor. you will flip the work plane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the work plane.

and click on the Options Bar. and to the left of the men’s restroom. Placing Power Receptacles | 301 . as shown.28 Draw a pick box around the 2 floor-based receptacles. . as shown. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below. select Multiple 29 Using the previous procedure.

33 Proceed to the next exercise.Power view.Power as shown.Power floor receptacles.Power. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 303. Select all 1 . place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2 . TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 . 31 You can save the open file if you wish. 302 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . open 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View.Power view. then copy and paste them in the 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.30 Using the same procedure.

scroll down the Category list. In the left pane of the Open dialog. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components. and select Spaces. and for Name. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports | 303 . you can refer to this report rather than having to measure spaces and count fixtures. Open the provided dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces.In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor.rvt. select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area 6 Click OK. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. A schedule is created similar to the one shown. enter Power & Lighting Usage. because it is quite common in Revit MEP. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. 4 Click OK. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Usage Reports. With the introduction of local energy codes. the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. under Available Fields. click the Training Files icon. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. as described below.

Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment.7 You can save the open file if you wish. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 304 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Placing Electrical Equipment on page 304. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and work toward the higher voltage.

5 On the Design Bar. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. select 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Placing Electrical Equipment | 305 . select Electrical Equipment. 9 Click OK. click the Training Files icon.Open the provided dataset. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. under Instance Parameters. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. click Electrical Equipment. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical space to the right of the panel as shown. and for Panel Name. and click to place the panel as shown. Add a transformer 10 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click Modify and select the panel you just placed.Loads category. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Electrical Equipment. and double-click 1 . click . 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. as described below. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. select 480/277 Wye. 6 On the Options Bar. under Electrical .Loads. scroll down to the Electrical . for Distribution Sys. click Element Properties. 4 In the Type Selector.Surface : 250A. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. select 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : 45kVA.rvt.Power. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Right-click the panel. 11 In the Type Selector.

select 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . scroll down to the Electrical . and place the panel to the right of the transformer. 14 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the panel you just placed. select 480/277 Wye. 18 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. 16 Click OK. click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter L-1. for Distribution Sys. enter T1. 23 Click OK.Surface : 100A. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. and for Panel Name.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. select 120/208 Wye. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. For Panel Name. scroll down to the Electrical . under Instance Parameters. 21 On the Options Bar. select Electrical Equipment. select 120/208 Wye. click . for Distribution Sys.Loads category. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter.Loads category. Since this is a transformer. 306 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 19 Click Modify. under Instance Parameters.

Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. . The temporary circuit displays Placing Electrical Equipment | 307 .Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. .Surface : 100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. 28 On the Options Bar.Surface : 250A named H-2 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: 45kVA named T2 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and select panel H-2 for Panel. 29 Select the transformer T2. and click 30 On the Options Bar. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 26 On the Options Bar. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. 27 Click (Select Panel). click as shown. click (Create Power Circuit). select panel L-2. In this case you are going to select something other than a panel. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer.

38 On the Options Bar. . 308 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . . indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. select the L-1 panel. and select the MDP panel. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces side-by-side. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. and click 39 Click . 37 Close the 2-Power view. 34 In the 2-Power view. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. select the H-2 panel. click 35 On the Option Bar. and on the Options Bar.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. click .

42 You can save the open file if you wish. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.40 Select the T1 transformer. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. and click 41 On the Options Bar. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. Creating Power Circuitry on page 309. lighting. . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating Power Circuitry | 309 . Circuits are used for power. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. and data systems. Open the provided dataset. click . Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and select the MDP panel. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. as described below. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select all the receptacles in the corner office. click . 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. For now. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. and voltage (120 V).Power to make it the active view. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. 3 While pressing Ctrl. load (180 VA).rvt. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office. 310 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .■ Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Power Circuitry. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. and double-click 1 . 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.

Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. 8 On the Options Bar. and press Tab. the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the office. Creating Power Circuitry | 311 .A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. You use the Specify Circuit Information to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. click for this circuit. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. and click to select the circuit again. press Tab. and select panel L-1 as the panel NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 6 Click Modify. NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance parameters. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted.

1-#12. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. which are the wire sizes for the load. change the value from 20A to 50A. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. When editing a circuit. 12 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. click (Circuit Properties). 312 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. Wire Type and Rating. 11 On the Options Bar. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. The editable parameters.10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. click (Edit Circuit). The currently specified values are 1-#12. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. and ground wiring. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. 1-#10. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. respectively for this circuit. 1-#6. 1-#12. neutral. will be discussed in a later exercise.

24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. click . zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. and then select panel L-1. and try to select panel L-1. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. 25 On the Options Bar. click Cancel. These will be connected in a later exercise. Creating Power Circuitry | 313 . 26 Continue creating circuits. click . 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. click . 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. scroll down to the Electrical . click . and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. and select panel L-1. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a space-by-space basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. and add it to panel L-1. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. click The circuit is created. 22 Click OK. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. 19 Close the warning message. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. .Loads category. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. under Instance Parameters. and click Element Properties. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. as previously described. creating power circuits. If you select L-1 in the drawing.15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes.

Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. 314 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 32 Click File menu ➤ Close.27 Using the same procedures. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. you have assigned only 17.Power to make it the active view. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). 30 Click OK. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. As you saw in the previous exercise. Finally. 28 Double-click 1 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Increase the number of circuits on panel L-2 to 18. These will be connected in a later exercise. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. create circuits in the 2 . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 314. Adding wiring to a project is optional. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. 29 Select the L-1 panel. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. and on the Options Bar. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. In the Edit Circuits dialog. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits.Power view and assign them to panel L-2.

7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Apply View Template dialog. Click 3 In the right pane. right-click 1 . 6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline. click the Training Files icon. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 315 . Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. and for Offset. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. select <all>.Open the provided dataset. as shown. enter -1' 0" For Bottom. as described below. enter 3' 0" Under View Depth.rvt. 13 In the Filter dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. select Electrical Lighting Plan. and for Offset. click (Filter). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. for Level. 2 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ For Show Type.Lighting to make it the active view. Create an Electrical Lighting Plan template for Lighting Views 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. in the Value column. select Lighting. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. For Names. enter Electrical Lighting Plan. and in the New View Template dialog.Lighting. 11 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. select Electrical Plan . and click Apply View Template. click Edit in the Value column. and click OK. Create lighting circuits 9 In the Project Browser. 4 In View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Top. for View Range. under Names. double-click 1 . select Associated Level. select Associated Level. 12 On the Options Bar. select Level Above. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. and for Offset. enter 3' 0" 5 Click OK. 10 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. under View Properties.

click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A).14 On the Options Bar. 316 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click . 15 Close the message window and. 16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown.

when you create wiring manually. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. 18 On the Options Bar. you created arc type wiring. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. When creating wires. and click the switch to select the switches. In this step. In the next steps. Later. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog.17 On the Options Bar. select Wires. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 317 . as in this step. click circuit. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the . click Check None. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. but with an additional vertex. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. neutral. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. 21 In the Filter dialog. click . or floors. Splined wiring is similar to arc. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. click (Filter). This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. you can specify splined wiring. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. ceilings. press Tab. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. click . ground) in the wire run. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. lighting fixtures.

27 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click the MDP panel. and assign each circuits to panel MDP. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. 28 Create permanent wiring for each circuit. and click OK. enter 2. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22. and click Element Properties. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors.22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. When this occurs. scroll down to the Electrical . NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. one neutral conductor. under Instance Parameters. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. and one ground conductor). enter 2 as the value. 24 Using the same method. for Hot Conductors.Loads category. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. click . The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 318 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Mech/Elec space.

and assign each circuit to panel H-2. 30 Right-click panel H-2. These will be connected in a later exercise. conference room. and restrooms in the 2 . assign the circuit to panel H-2. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1 . NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. Otherwise.Lighting view.Loads category. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. 32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices.Lighting. and in the Element Properties dialog. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 319 . and click OK. then creating lighting circuits in 2 . under Instance Parameters. lounge. Creating Switch Systems on page 320.Lighting view. 31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2.29 For more practice. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. scroll down to the Electrical .

34 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 320 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .33 You can save the open file if you wish. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Switch Systems. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. and specify switch IDs for switches. fixtures. Open the provided dataset. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. click the Training Files icon. Creating Switch Systems on page 320.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. as described below. and double-click 1 . and panel information. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. 1 In the Project Browser.Lighting to make it the active view. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. assign lighting fixtures to switches. but does not prevent you from doing so. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. you will create a space schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

Then. TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. and click to select everything in the system. press Tab. 6 On the Switch System toolbar. Creating Switch Systems | 321 . ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. 5 With the switch system still selected. on the Options Bar. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. click Finish to confirm your selections. select The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. click (Filter) to select only the lighting fixtures. you can highlight one of the lighting fixtures. (Edit Switch System). Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding switches). click Multiple. 3 On the Options Bar. click (Create Switch System). After creating the switch system. 4 Click (Select Switch for System). With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area.2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. click The Switch System toolbar is activated. (Remove From System).

17 In the Element Properties dialog. for Switch ID. enter North Stairwell . click outside the ladies’ restroom. click Finish. 9 Click (Switch Properties). 15 Click 16 Click . under Instance Properties. for Switch ID.7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. click Finish. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. click . 8 On the Options Bar.1st Floor. 322 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . enter Main Entrance . under Instance Properties. (Select Switch). 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and select the switch on the wall 14 On the Switch System toolbar. (Switch Properties). 11 On the Switch System toolbar. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 27 fixtures remaining in the system. The Switch ID is updated on the Options Bar.West. and click OK.

select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. For Name. scroll down the Available fields list. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. 21 Using the same method. stairwell. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. and for Heading. and on the Options Bar. select Number. 20 Click . 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Creating Switch Systems | 323 . 26 On the Formatting tab. enter Switch Systems. and restrooms in the 1 . 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. select Number from the Fields list. click Finish. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.18 On the Switch System toolbar. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. click . Verify that Ascending is selected. select Spaces. enter Space Number.Lighting view.

28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 31 You can save the open file if you wish.Lighting view.2nd Floor for the switch ID. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. and private offices. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. conference room. continue creating switch systems in the 2 . scroll down the Available fields list. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Specify Open Area . 324 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. Otherwise. The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. restrooms. 30 For more practice. Create separate systems for the lounge.

click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the provided dataset. 1 In the Project Browser. as described below. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 325 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Using the same method. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar.Power to make it the active view. 3 In the corner office. and double-click 1 . generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces along the left side of the plan.

verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. click Wire.6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper offices. and delete both home runs. 326 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper offices are visible. 10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top office to specify the start point for the wire. 8 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

11 Click in the open area near the door for the office to specify the second point for the wire. as shown. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 327 . 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint for the wire.

create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower offices. When completed. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the 328 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. when the wiring is completed. and using the same method. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. The direction will be corrected. if necessary. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible. your layout should look similar to the following: Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel.

and click. select Insert Vertex. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower office. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. a shared neutral.number of hot conductors. 14 Click Modify. and a shared safety ground). drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. 17 Right click the wire run. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 329 . as the circuits in each office was added to the wiring run. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower office as shown. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. In the previous steps.

adjusting its shape according to the vertex location.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. The wire behaves like a spline. Completed 1-Power 330 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 19 For additional practice. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1 . or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.Power and 2 .Power views.

In this exercise. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Open the provided dataset.Power to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Checking Your Design.rvt. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Checking Your Design on page 331. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as described below. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. Checking Your Design | 331 . The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.

8 In the System Browser. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner office is visible. 6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. release the mouse button. 332 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. and click Select. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. 7 In the System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 5 Right-click a column heading. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline.

6 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser.The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 . 10 Open the 1 . collapse Power.Lighting views and close any windows. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. and 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area.Power. and expand Unassigned. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Checking Your Design | 333 .Lighting and 2 . The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP).

click Finish. 17 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. click create permanent wiring. 16 Click the title bar of the 2 .Lighting view. 18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. until the power circuit is previewed. (Add to Circuit). and on the Options Bar. clear Multiple. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. press Tab several times. click . You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level.Lighting view.The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 . click to select the circuit. click 15 On the Options Bar. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. In the System Browser. to 334 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell.Lighting view have not yet been connected. 14 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. and on the Options Bar. 13 In the 1 .

and click OK. click the title bar of the 2 . press Tab. click 27 On the Options Bar. Checking Your Design | 335 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. select panel L-1.Lighting view. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. for Hot Conductors. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. 20 On the Options Bar. click . enter 2. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. 19 In the 1 . double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. under Instance Parameters. click Check None.Lighting view. and in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 22 Click . Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. 25 In the drawing area.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. . select Wires. In the System Browser. 21 In the Filter dialog.

28 Click to create permanent wiring. 336 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

Check Circuits 30 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 33 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. Checking Your Design | 337 .29 Using the same method. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. create a power circuit for the 6 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. click Check Circuits. 32 Click to view details of the warning. 31 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.

36 Click File menu ➤ Close. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. 35 You can save the open file if you wish. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 34 Close the Warning dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Circuit Loads. click the Training Files icon. Finally. In this exercise. and double-click 2 . 338 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits.rvt. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. as described below. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Defining Circuit Loads on page 338.Power. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. In the Project Browser.

Defining Circuit Loads | 339 . click Rebalance Loads. B.4500 VA. 3 On the Options Bar. click . select panel L-2. Examination of the loads on Phase A. and Phase C . Phase B 4860 VA. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and Phase C provides 3780 VA. 5 Click OK. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 5040 VA on Phase B.4320 VA). while Phase A provides 4860 VA.2 In the Mechanical/Electrical space.

Therefore. and on the Options Bar. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. the 3 circuits feed transformer T1. click 8 In the Project Browser. for panel H-2. 7 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. 14 In the Type Selector. The remaining circuits feed the lighting circuits on Level 1. so no further changes are required. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. 12 Click OK. the H-2 panel. select the T1 transformer. and the T1 transformer. 13 In the 1 .Power view. and present a load of 12960 VA. After the loads are balanced. and present a load 6496 VA. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. and on the Options Bar. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 10 Select panel MDP.Power. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. . The 3 circuits that feed panel H-2 present a load of 18844 VA. 9 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. you may see different values for the loads. L-1 and MDP. 340 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Therefore. enter 40A for the Trip value. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. double-click 1 . you can use a 30kVA transformer. the actual load connected to it (12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. click .6 Select panel H-2. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. enter 100A for the Trip value. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. H-2 is a 100A panel. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. and for T1. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA.

on the Options Bar. select the T2 transformer. 1-#1. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. which will require a 40A circuit breaker.00A. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. 100. 26 Click OK.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Circuit Properties). 20 Under Electrical-Loads. enter 40A for the Trip value. 21 Scroll down. 1-#12. select panel H-2. 18 With panel L-1 selected. 23 In the Project Browser. 1-#12. 17 Click OK. 28 In the Type Selector.Power to make it the active view. 1-#8. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. 27 In the 2 . for transformer T2. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. Verify/adjust wire sizes 15 Right-click panel L-1. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click . you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. 19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. Notice that it changes to 3-#1. enter 100A for Rating. under Instance Parameters. Defining Circuit Loads | 341 . Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. 22 Click OK. and on the Options Bar.Power view. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. and click Element Properties. 25 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space.Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. double-click 2 .

you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. 35 On the Options Bar. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 342 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . under Instance Parameters. click . 33 With the MDP panel selected. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. under Electrical Loads. 36 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. click .Power to make it the active view. 29 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. 37 You can save the open file if you wish. 31 Click OK. Size the service entrance conductors 32 In the Project Browser.00A. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 34 Close the Warning. double-click 1 . scroll down to the Electrical-Loads.

you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. navigate to Training Files ➤ Architectural. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. As you create the plumbing system. However. hot and cold water piping. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009.autodesk. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory.rvt. you will understand the process. including plumbing fixtures. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. If the tutorial datasets are not present. By following this workflow. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. However. After finishing each exercise. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 343 . You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. and select i Office Building. At the end of this tutorial. In this tutorial. click Reload From. and sanitary piping. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. you can choose to save your work. methodology. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. go to http://www.Plumbing Systems 7 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. if the link is lost. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2009.

Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click the Training Files icon. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In this lesson.rfa 5 Click Open. 344 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Loading Plumbing Parts.rfa Urinal . 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Water Closet . you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system.rvt. planning is critical to a successful design.Floor Mounted.Wall Hung. click the Training Files icon.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Flush Valve . you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. 3 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing.

select Pipe Transition .Floor Mounted and Urinal . 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Glued: Standard For Transition. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. select Pipe Cross . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. select Pipe Bend .Flush Valve . and click Duplicate.6 In the Project Browser. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. click the Training Files icon.PVC: Standard Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 345 . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Configuring Plumbing and Pipe Systems. and click Properties. click Rename.Sanitary . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 2 Right-click PVC. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 345. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: Water Closet . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. are added under Families in the Project Browser.Glued. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow.DWV . expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. 6 Under Mechanical. enter PVC Sanitary.PVC: Standard For Preferred Junction Type.PVC: Standard For Tap. 5 In the Rename dialog.rfa Pipe Reducing Short Tee . 12 You can save the open file if you wish. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa 11 Click Open. for New. All of the loaded families.PVC . 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Pipe Bend . Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Glued. select Tee For Tee.Sanitary . The selected component families are loaded into the project.Wall Hung. click the Training Files icon. select Pipe Short Tee . 3 Right-click PVC 2. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. select None For Cross.rvt.

you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. enter PVC Sanitary Vent. You then modify the piping. verify that Pipe Cross . 13 Proceed to the next exercise.■ For Union.PVC: Standard is selected For Preferred Junction Type. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. verify that Pipe Bend .PVC: Standard 7 Click Apply. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. Add Plumbing Fixtures on page 346. you add 2 toilets. ZR (Zoom Region).PVC: Standard For Tap. select Pipe Coupling . In this lesson.PVC . verify that Tee is selected For Tee. then click Duplicate. 11 You can save the open file if you wish. and click OK. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 3 urinals. verify that Pipe Coupling . and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Adding Plumbing Fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. select None For Cross. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 In the Name dialog. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. select Pipe Tee . 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. for Name. Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. 9 Under Mechanical. 346 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Glued: Standard is selected For Transition. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Finally.PVC: Standard is selected 10 Click OK to close the Type Properties dialog. verify that Pipe Transition . Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 sinks.PVC: Standard is selected For Union.Vent . click the Training Files icon.

a On the Design Bar. 3 wall-mounted urinals. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 4 Select Water Closet . 5 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 347 . and click to place the toilet in the approximate location shown. click Dimension.Flush Valve . 6 Click Modify.The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.6 gpf in the Type Selector. Position the first toilet 7 Position the toilet 6" from the upper wall. and 3 sinks.Floor Mounted : Private 1. click Plumbing Fixture. and 1' 6" from the right wall.

d Move the cursor down. The toilet is placed 6" from the upper wall of the toilet stall. and on the Edit toolbar. and click to place the dimension annotation. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Copy). click 9 On the Options Bar.b On the Options Bar. The toilet is placed 1' 6" from the right wall. click the value for the blue dimension to the right. Clear Constrain Verify that Copy is selected Clear Multiple 348 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . j Delete both dimension annotations. i Click Modify. and Individual References is selected for Pick. and press Enter. g Select the toilet. c Click the face of the right wall. place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the back of the toilet. h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet. and press Enter. Add a second toilet 8 Select the toilet. move the cursor over the center of the toilet. e Using the same method. and click. verify that (Aligned) is selected. f Click Modify. enter 1' 6". enter 0' 6". Wall faces is selected for Prefer.

19 Using the same method. click Plumbing Fixture. do the following. ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. 18 Move the cursor down. and on the Options Bar. and when the alignment snap displays and the preview is from the original toilet. 15 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 11 Move the preview of the toilet 5' 0" to the left (into the left stall). 13 Select Urinal . place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. click to place the toilet as shown. 16 On the Design Bar.Wall Hung : 3/4 Flush Valve in the Type Selector. click Dimension. select Wall centerlines Verify that Individual References is selected for Pick 17 Click the centerline of the left wall. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 349 . verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. and click to place the dimension annotation. 14 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. and click. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. Place wall-mounted urinals 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and place 3 urinals approximately as shown.10 Click the center line of the toilet to establish a start point.

Island . then move the cursor up. and click to place the dimensions annotation. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. 25 While pressing Ctrl. (Equal Control) 24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. place the leftmost urinal 1' 8" from the left wall. and press Delete.20 Working from left to right. click the value for the blue dimension.Single : 18"x18". and enter 1' 8". Place sinks 26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Plumbing Fixture. 22 Using the same method. The urinal is placed 1' 8" from the wall of the toilet stall. 27 On the Options Bar click (Place on Face). click the centerline of each urinal in succession. 350 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. select the counter top. and in the Type Selector. 21 Select the rightmost urinal. select Sink . and click the blue above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. 23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. 28 In the drawing area.

approximately as shown. 33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. 31 Click Modify. Place the floor drain 36 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.Round : 5" Stainer . and in the Type selector. click Dimension. as shown.3" Drain. select Floor Drain . and click to place the floor drain. specify the distance between the center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 1' 10". 37 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane). click Plumbing Fixture. 32 On the Design Bar.29 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. select Level : Level 2. 38 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. then equalize the space between sinks. 30 Place 3 sinks. 34 Using the same method specify the distance between the center line of the wall below the sinks and the center line of each sink. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 351 . specify the distance between the drain center line and the lower wall as 1' 6". and for Plane. 35 Delete the dimension annotations. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation.

Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Starting the Sanitary Piping System. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 352 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 352. and click View Properties. 4 In the View Range dialog. specify Fine for Detail Level. click the Training Files icon. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Bottom Offset Under View Depth. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. In this exercise. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Level Offset 5 Click OK twice.39 Click Modify. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. verify the view range settings: ■ ■ Under Primary Range. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. scroll down to View Range. and click Edit. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. under Extents. urinals. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. 6 On the View Control Bar. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and floor drain. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. select Sanitary from the System Type list. 18 Zoom in on the men’s room. 16 Right-click in the system browser table heading. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. specify -1' 0" 11 In the left panel. click Branch. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Click Window ➤ System Browser. as shown. click (Create Sanitary System). 19 On the Options Bar. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. and floor drain. specify -1' 0" 13 Click OK. click Mechanical Settings. 9 In the right panel. click View ➤ Piping. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. The urinals. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. toilets. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 353 . 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. and click Main. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. 15 Click the title bar for the browser.

click Solutions. specify -4' 0" and for D. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. 28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. select 4". 22 Select one of the components in the newly created sanitary system. 23 In the Select a System dialog. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. and click OK. and click to place the base approximately as shown. click (Layout Path). and on the Options Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. click Place Base. click Sanitary 1. and a preview of the piping layout displays. 21 Click (Thin Lines) on the toolbar. for Offset.20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the view. and on the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor over the chase. enter 1/8" for Slope. 354 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 26 On the Options Bar.

It’s easier if each segment can be moved to a snap. as needed. 29 Select solution 1. and on the Design Bar. to view them. Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. click Modify. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 355 . You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout. Customize the layout 30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout.Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. and do the following: a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle of the chase above the urinals.

NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment to the same location. and click to align the branch to the main segment. select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. 31 Click Finish Layout. and drag the segment down into the chase.b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the rightmost toilet. d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal. Snap the main in the middle of the chase. This makes it easier to locate a snap. 356 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . c Using the same method.

as shown. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 357 . When a fitting is reversed. c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. and check the slope control.32 Examine the piping that was automatically created. The third tab should highlight the entire system. b Select each pipe segment in the system. slope. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. and orientation of fittings: a Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. The second tab highlights the fixture. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. checking for the proper connectivity. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch.

35 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 37 On the View Control Bar. specify Fine for Detail Level. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 36 Click OK. 34 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. and double-click 3D Plumbing. VG (Visibility/Graphics). and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. Enter the keyboard shortcut. click Show categories from all disciplines.33 In the Project Browser. 358 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

40 Proceed to the next exercise. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Connecting Sink Drain Lines. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 359 . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. 1 In the Project Browser. adding the sinks in the men’s room. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 359 to continue creating the sanitary system.38 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. verify that 1/8" /12" is specified for the slope. press the Space Bar once. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. 360 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click Draw Pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. right-click the connector on the open leg. 7 Click Modify. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. enter 13. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. When you press the space bar. and press Enter. and on the Options Bar.4 Select the tee.

you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. and press Enter. and when the snap displays. and select Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard in the Type Selector. click to place the fitting. 10 Click Modify. 11 Select the fitting. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and select Pipe Reducing Wye-DWV-Glued : Standard in the Type Selector.If you select the pipe. click Pipe Fitting. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. click to place the fitting. and when the extension snap displays. enter 2". click the blue size control for the wye leg. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 361 . click Pipe Fitting.

17 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays.14 Click Modify. and when the end of the pipe is even with wall centerline. click to specify the end of the pipe. 16 Select the wye fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. click to specify the end of the first segment of pipe. and on the Options Bar. 362 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down to a point approximately even with the centerline of the wall below the sinks. verify that Auto Connect is selected. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and that 1/8" /12" is specified for slope. 15 Using the method learned earlier. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. highlight the wye. right-click the connector on the open leg.

22 In the 3D view. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. In this case. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. the vertical pipe extends above the level of the floor. enter 0' 6" for Offset. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. 24 On the Plumbing tab. and click to place the fitting. press Space. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 363 . click Apply. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described in the previous exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Double Wye . and click Modify. click Pipe Fitting. If necessary.20 On the Options Bar.Glued : Standard.DWV .

VG (Visibility/Graphics) to hide architectural components that will interfere with selecting plumbing components. specify Hidden Line. click shown above. and in the drawing area. If necessary. 29 On the View tab Design Bar. place a section below the sinks as shown. to orient the fitting. without having to enter ' and " symbols. 31 On the View Control Bar. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches.Plumbing to make it the active view. 30 Double-click the head of the section to open the section view. 364 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and on the Options Bar. specify Fine. for Detail Level. 26 Click Modify. For example. and for Model Graphics Style. 32 Enter the keyboard shortcut. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 28 Double-click 2 .The double wye is added to the vertical segment. click Section. in this step you can enter 0 8 (zero space eight) to specify 8". In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. TIP When entering dimensions. specify 0' 8" for Offset. as 27 Select the double wye fitting.

do the following: a Click Show categories from all disciplines b Click All. 41 Click Modify. and click All again d Select any category. draw the pipe up to the left. 38 Click the connector snap on the center leg. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 1 0 and press Enter. for Offset. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 0 6 and press Enter. The fitting moves to the left when pipe is connected to the left leg. After adding the piping to the right and left leg. 39 Click Modify. click Pipe. and clear the check from any category c Clear Show categories from all disciplines. 40 Select the double-wye fitting again. click None. then clear the check from Lines e Click OK 34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. 36 Click Modify. 37 Using the same method. On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify 0' 6". and on the Options Bar. it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting. in line with the angle for the leg.33 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. draw a 1' pipe from the right leg of the double-wye. draw the pipe up. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 365 . then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg.

44 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. and on the Options Bar. and double-click 2 . expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and select the leftmost sink. and click Apply Verify 1/8" /12" is specified for slope 46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. 366 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. 45 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. enter 1' 6". 47 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector.42 In the Project Browser. 48 Using the same method. 50 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. double-click 3D Plumbing.Plumbing. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 43 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. do the following: ■ ■ For Offset. 49 In the Project Browser.

59 Using the same method. and select a proposed solution. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 367 . 54 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). for D. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. 56 While pressing Ctrl. for D. select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. and on the Options Bar. While pressing Ctrl. select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it. specify 1 1/2". You use the proposed solutions. specify 2". 57 Select solution 7of 7. 52 Click Modify. click Routing Solutions. 58 Click Modify.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size. 61 Select the double-wye. and on the Options Bar. 60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. 53 While pressing Ctrl. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through 55 Select solution 9 of 16. click Routing Solutions. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink.

Close the warning. 63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar. and click Finish. 65 On the Options Bar. This is to be expected. enter 1/8" / 12".Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. for Slope. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. 368 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the segment where the slope could not be applied. 64 On the toolbar.

you can specify the elevation of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe. If necessary. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 369 .66 Using the same method. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. and click Select. This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without changing the slope. right-click Sanitary 1. 72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. expand Sanitary. the piping to the middle sink is already sloped. and under Instance Parameters. (Add to System). The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to the zoom level. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. click (Edit System). Since the routing solution applied to the middle sink used the existing pipe (without adding a segment). modifying offset values. while pressing Ctrl. 67 In the System Browser. click 69 On the Edit System toolbar. right-click the pipe. You can move fixtures by dragging. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. click Element Properties. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. select all 3 sinks. click to select the reference end of the pipe. click Multiple. click Finish on the Options Bar. you can make minor adjustments to the system. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. then click Finish on the Edit System toolbar. 68 On the Options Bar. When zoomed in close. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical. Then. 70 In the drawing area. specify the exact Offset. there is a smaller movement. specify the slope for the piping to the left sink. and on the Options Bar.

and in the Type Selector. select Pipe Bend .Glued : Standard. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.PVC : Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions.DWV . highlight the leftmost sink. (After the third tab.When the piping was created for the sink drains. 75 Using the method learned earlier.DWV . 73 While pressing Ctrl. Pipe Bend .Glued : Standard. and select Pipe Bend .DWV . Now that the routing is completed.) 370 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. the entire system should be highlighted. you can change these to the more commonly used Pipe Bend .Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. 74 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye.

click File menu ➤ Save As. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 371 . while maintaining the same angle. and carefully drag it away from the elbow.76 If you want to save your work. 77 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 78 Click File menu ➤ Close. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. skip the next 2 steps. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. adjusting the sanitary stack.rvt. and select the horizontal pipe. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 371 to continue creating the sanitary system. click the Training Files icon. otherwise. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 79 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Waste Stack Connection.

press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). and press Delete. 5 Select the vertical pipe segment. specify 6" for D (diameter). click Pipe Fitting. and on the Options Bar. and when the Extension snap displays.4 Select the elbow. and click to place the fitting.Glued : Standard. 7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. and select Pipe Reducing Wye . 372 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .DWV . Add a reducing wye to the stack 6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

click Section.Plumbing. and click the sanitary piping. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 373 . 11 On the View tab on the Design Bar.8 Click Modify. enter 4 to change its size. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. select the wye. The wye is added to the vertical segment. and click Modify. If necessary. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 10 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click the value for the 45 degree leg. double-click 2 . and press Enter. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward 9 Select the wye.

15 On the Options Bar. and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and when the center line for the main segment displays.12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. and select the reducing wye fitting. 16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg. click Draw Pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe. specify Fine. enter -2' 6" for Offset. press Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 13 On the View Control Bar. and press Enter. for Detail Level. 14 Zoom in. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. 374 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

18 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. The exact position of the riser is not critical in this application. when the location is critical. and on the Options Bar. 21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Bend . click Draw Pipe. 17 Click Modify. The fitting moves toward the pipe being added after the pipe is drawn. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent.Glued : Standard.NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the reducing tee. then enter 4 0 and press Enter to add a 4' 0" vertical vent pipe. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool.DWV . 23 Click Modify. click Routing Solutions. and in the Type Selector. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). However. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 375 . it will be necessary to move the piping after making the connection. select solution 3 of 3. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. 19 On the Options Bar. 22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting.

click the Training Files icon. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping.) 376 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. running it inside the wall.rvt. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. Refining the Urinal Lines on page 376 to continue creating the plumbing system. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Urinal Waste Lines. then down to connect with the sanitary main. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (If necessary. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown.25 You can save the open file if you wish. use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals.

6 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the end of the pipe. specify 1/8" /12" 7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 8". click the pipe above the urinal. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost urinal displays. starting at the level of the original pipe. enter 0' 6" and press Tab. for Offset. and on the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 0' 6". 9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left. click Connector 2 : Sanitary Round : 2" Out. 8 On the Options Bar. Refining the Urinal Lines | 377 . click 13 In the drawing area. and click OK. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. click Draw Pipe. click the connector snap. (Connect Into). 12 In the Select Connector dialog. specify 2" Click (Auto Connect) ■ ■ For slope. 11 Select the leftmost urinal.3 Press Delete. click to specify the end of the pipe. press the Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector For D. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet.

click (Filter Selection). 378 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 17 On the Routing Modify toolbar. and click Finish. and on the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click The slope is applied to the selected piping. (Slope). 16 In the Filter dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. 15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 2" piping just added as shown. Do not include the riser and fitting. 18 On the Options Bar.Plumbing to make it the active view. connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. verify that 1/8" /12" for Slope.14 Using the same method. clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK.

specify 3" for D (diameter). However. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 4" segment) as shown. So.Plumbing to make it the active view.Resize pipes 20 In the Project Browser. Refining the Urinal Lines | 379 . you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. 21 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. double-click 2 . 22 On the Options Bar.

This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. 24 Select the elbow. and in the Type Selector. for D. 30 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click to place the plug on the tee. 26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. and on the Options Bar. 32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals. 31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North. and when the extension snap displays. and on the Options Bar. 380 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click Pipe Fitting. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. select Pipe PVC Plug : Standard. and on the Options Bar. then select 2".Add a cleanout 23 Select the pipe between the 3" elbow and the left urinal. Redefine fittings 28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. 27 Select the pipe to the urinal again. specify 2" for D. double-click 3D. and in the Type Selector.Sanitary . 29 Select the 2" pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main. 25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.Glued : Standard is selected. verify that Pipe Reducing Short Tee . select 3".Plumbing to make it the active view. specify 3" for D (diameter).

33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and select Pipe Bend .This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. 34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. 35 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. Refining the Urinal Lines | 381 .DVW .Glued : Standard.

click the Training Files icon.rvt. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. If necessary. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close.36 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Vents to the System on page 382 to continue creating the plumbing system. 382 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described previously. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

and specify 14' for Offset. NOTE You must press Tab or move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. 8 Click Modify. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. Apply a filter to the vent piping 9 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 10 On the Filters tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. do the following: a Click Edit/New. specify 0" for Rise/12". click Pipe. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 7 Click Apply. and in the Type Selector. Adding Vents to the System | 383 . specify 2" for D (diameter). VG (Visibility/Graphics).

select IMPORT-DASHED (2) j Click OK twice. click Rename. c Right-click Sanitary 1. specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent. f In the Add Filters dialog.Plumbing to make it the active view. click the Color button. e In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select (green). and click OK. select Sanitary Vent. 12 On the View tab on the Design Bar. h In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK. and click (Duplicate).b In the Filters dialog. and place a section above the urinals and toilets as shown. rename the filter Sanitary Vent. d Under the Filter Rules. select Sanitary from the Filters list. and click OK. i In the Line Graphics dialog. and in the Color dialog. click Section. click Add. g For Sanitary Vent. Create additional vents 11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 . and click Override. for Pattern. and click OK. Vent piping throughout the plan appear as dashed green lines. click the Lines column. 384 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and zoom in to view the urinals and toilets.

specify 2" for D (diameter). and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. specify Wireframe. click to specify the end of the first pipe section. verify the (Auto Connect) is selected. clear unwanted architectural components from the view as described previously. click Pipe. click to make the connection to the vent as shown. 20 At a point above the toilets. 16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify Fine. Adding Vents to the System | 385 . and for Model Graphics Style. and enter the keyboard shortcut VG. 19 Begin drawing the vertical pipe. for Detail Level. and enter 1/8" /12" for slope. then drag the preview to the right and when the center snap for the previously created vent displays. 15 On the View Control Bar. 18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. 17 On the Options Bar.13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view. and on the Options Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

for Offset. b Begin the vertical pipe. e If necessary. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. c For D. The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe.21 Click Modify. specify 2". and click Element Properties. 25 Place another vent between the two rightmost urinals: a Click the midpoint of the pipe between the urinals. d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays. press Tab to display the connector. 24 Select the tee that was inserted when you connected the vents. and click OK. 386 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . enter 9' 6" to specify the elevation for the reference end of the pipe. 22 Right-click the new horizontal pipe. and click to make the connection. draw the pipe to the left to the open leg of the cross. and click the + control to update the tee to a cross. under Instance Parameters. f Click Modify.

26 Double-click 3D . use the Flip control to make the adjustment. Adding Vents to the System | 387 .Plumbing to make it the active view. 27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping.

select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. 388 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 33 Click Modify. 32 On the Options Bar. specify 2" for D (diameter). and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. 29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. specify 2" for D (diameter). verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. move the cursor into the drawing area. 31 Right-click the tee. and specify 9' 6" for Offset. click Draw Pipe. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. and on the Options Bar.Add a vent to the sinks 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 30 While pressing Ctrl. then click Apply.

and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. and click Finish. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. (Slope). click 39 Enter 1/8" /12" for slope. Adding Vents to the System | 389 . 36 On the Options Bar specify 0" /12" for slope. 38 Select the horizontal vent pipe. 37 Drag the pipe preview. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. right-click the connector at the open end. 35 Select the vent. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. and on the Routing Modify toolbar. click Draw Pipe.34 Zoom out to view the vents from the toilets and urinals and the new vent from the sinks.

42 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. and click OK. Create the Cold Water System on page 390 to continue creating the plumbing system. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click Standard.rvt. click Rename. for New. click the Training Files icon. 390 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .40 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. and click Duplicate. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click Standard 1. 4 In the Rename dialog. 41 You can save the open file if you wish. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Cold Water. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Cold Water Piping. click Properties.

specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. 17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. click Main. Create the cold water system 15 In the Project Browser. specify None For Cross. and on the Options Bar click (Filter Selection). 12 In the table.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. Create the Cold Water System | 391 . and avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. 11 In the left pane. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. and in the right pane. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow.Plumbing to make it the active view. specify Pipe Cross: Standard For Transition. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 16 Press F9 to open the System Browser. specify Pipe Straight Coupling: Standard 6 Click Apply. specify Pipe Elbow : Standard For Preferred Junction Type. Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. click the floor drain. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. specify Pipe Tee: Standard For Tap. and click OK. specify Tee For Tee. The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and in the right pane. click Mechanical Settings. and click OK twice. 9 In the table. in the right pane. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 10 In the left pane. 13 In the left panel. specify Pipe Transition : Standard For Union. click Check None. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). 21 On the Options Bar. click Branch. which places the piping above the ceiling. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. in the right pane. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. 14 Click OK. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. and double-click 2 . click View ➤ Piping. then select Plumbing Fixtures. You now have the cold water piping at 9' 3" and the hot water piping at 9' 0". 20 While pressing Shift. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. then click Duplicate. enter Hot Water. 19 In the Filter dialog. click Main. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. click Branch. for Name. and in the Name dialog.

392 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . specify 0" /12" for Slope. Piping is added to connect the sink to the cold water system. and on the Options Bar. click Pipe. click (Connect Into). select the domestic cold water connector.The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. and click OK. 24 On the Option Bar. and click to specify the end the segment. and click to end the run as shown. click OK. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. Create piping for the cold water system 22 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. specify 2' 6" for Offset. click Show categories from all disciplines. and in the Type Selector. clear Casework. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. 23 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 32 Select the middle sink in the view. 35 On the Plumbing tab. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 34 Zoom in on the area between the middle and rightmost sink. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. 33 In the Select Connector dialog. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. 30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG. 29 Click Modify. 26 On the Options Bar. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. click Pipe.

and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. drag the preview into the center of the wall behind the sinks. just above the wall.) 41 On the Plumbing tab. 40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. click the snap on the cold water pipe. and click to end that segment. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. (If necessary. Create the Cold Water System | 393 .36 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the sinks. click Pipe. press Tab. specify 1' 2" for Offset. specify 9' 3" for Offset. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. 38 On the Options Bar. 42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase. and click Apply. select the cold water pipe. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. 43 Drag the preview to the left. 44 On the Options Bar. press Tab to avoid connecting to the sanitary piping. 37 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. 39 Click Modify. click to specify the end of the pipe.

and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. 394 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click Draw Pipe. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 46 In the Project Browser.45 Click Modify. 50 On the Plumbing tab. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. click Pipe. 51 Select the tee. right-click the open connector. 48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). 52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle. select the rightmost toilet. 47 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. click to specify the endpoint as shown.Plumbing. and click the + control to change it to a tee. double-click 3D. 49 Select the elbow behind the toilet. and when the center line for the left toilet displays.

Create the Cold Water System | 395 . 56 Use the same method. 54 Select the leftmost toilet. and click the vertical cold water Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click the horizontal cold Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. .53 Click Modify. . connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. 55 Select the rightmost urinal. and on the Options Bar click pipe. and on the Options Bar click water pipe that you added to the tee.

396 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .All of the cold water piping is in place. and the horizontal segment to the sinks. the tee. as shown. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D .Plumbing view as shown. The final steps in this exercise adjust the size of several sections of the piping. 58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room.

specify 2" for D (diameter). 62 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. as shown. but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). 61 On the Options Bar. 60 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. 63 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). feeding the toilets and urinals (including the tees. specify 1 1/2" for D (diameter). Create the Cold Water System | 397 .59 On the Options Bar.

specify 3/4" for D (diameter). 68 Proceed to the next exercise. 398 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 66 You can save the open file if you wish.64 On the Options Bar.Plumbing. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. Create the Hot Water System on page 398. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. double-click 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 65 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. create the hot water system. click the Training Files icon. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater.rvt. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Hot Water Piping. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and zoom in on the sinks. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.

15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and in the Type Selector. click Finish. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room.2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. The Edit System toolbar is activated. click Mechanical Equipment. select Water Heater : 40Gallon. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. expand Domestic Cold Water. click the water heater. select Plumbing Fixtures. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Domestic Hot Water.rfa. click (Filter Selection). The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. click the Training Files icon. and click to place the water heater as shown. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. click System toolbar. (Add to System). 10 Double-click Water Heater. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. 16 On the Edit System toolbar. to the left of the main cold water pipe. 5 In the Filter dialog. 12 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. and click Select. click (Edit System). click Check None. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. 14 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Piping. and on the Edit 17 In the System Browser. and click Select. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. click the title bar for the browser. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). and on the Options Bar. Create the Hot Water System | 399 .

24 Move the cursor over the water heater. 400 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click (Edit System). 23 On the Plumbing tab. click Draw Pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click when the hot water connector displays. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. add the water heater to the cold water system. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select the domestic cold water connector. 25 On the Options Bar. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. and in the Type Selector. click OK.18 On the Options Bar. 19 Using the same method. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. and on the Options Bar. click Pipe. and click the main cold water pipe. 20 Select the water heater in the view. click (Connect Into). right-click the connector. specify 8' 6" for Offset. select Pipe Types : Hot Water.

select Pipe Types : Hot Water. and in the Type Selector. 28 On the Plumbing tab. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. specify 2' 8" for Offset. Create the Hot Water System | 401 . click Pipe. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. 30 On the Options Bar. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.27 Click Modify. and click to specify the end of the segment. 33 Click Modify. 31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown.

36 Right-click the open connector. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. click click the hot water pipe below the sinks. click Pipe. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. 41 On the Plumbing tab. 40 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. 38 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and click to end that segment. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. and In this case. click Draw Pipe. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. specify 2' 8" for Offset.34 Select the middle sink in the view. (Connect Into). 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. 39 Click Modify. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. 402 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click Apply. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.Plumbing.

expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. 43 Click Modify. 44 In the Project Browser.42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. double-click 2 . 47 Click File menu ➤ Close. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view.Plumbing. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click. Create the Hot Water System | 403 . 46 You can save the open file if you wish.

404 .

By following the recommended workflow. At the end of this tutorial. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. Then. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. Designing Fire Protection Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. create schedules. and select i Office Building. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. However. If the tutorial datasets are not present. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. methodology. you can choose to save your work. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. During the fire protection design process. click Reload From. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and finally. As you create the systems.autodesk. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. In this tutorial. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. and size and tag the pipes. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. In this lesson. insert fittings.rvt. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. 405 . if the link is lost. go to http://www. manually modify the pipes and fittings. However. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you will understand the process. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2009. you create views and pipe types. After finishing each exercise. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.Fire Protection Systems 8 In this tutorial. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. you create a wet and dry fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.

you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. and click OK. click Mechanical Settings. for New. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 7 With the Type Properties dialog open. Next. Open the i Starting the Fire Protection Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Type Selector. Next. 13 Under System Type. and click Duplicate. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. Create new pipe types 1 In the Project Browser. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. including the new material property. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Rename. 5 In the Rename dialog. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. 3 Right-click the copy. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. you modify the pipe type properties. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Duplicate. click the Training Files icon. You create new pipe types. Next. for Material. and click Properties. select Main. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. under Mechanical. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. 2 Right-click Standard. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. select Carbon Steel. select Fire Protection Wet. right-click the Design Bar. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. and click OK. 406 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 12 For System Type. Configure pipe conversion settings 10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. and click Fire Protection.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. enter Fire Protection Wet.Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise.

This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. So. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. for Offset verify 9' 0". Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. For Offset. structural beams. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. click Schedule/Quantities. select Fire Protection Wet. ■ ■ Define columns 21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. duct. select Area. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. and specify Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping. and click Remove. 20 In the New Schedule dialog. 15 For System Type. and click Add. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 23 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. 17 Using the same method. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Spaces. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Create a Space Schedule 19 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. However. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. 18 Click OK. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. under Available fields. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 407 . the pipe main will be offset from level 2. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. 22 While pressing Ctrl. or architectural components. 16 Under System Type. 14 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Branch. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. verify that 9' 0" is selected. To remove a field. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.■ For Offset. for System Type Fire Protection Dry. select it. do the following: ■ Under Category.

For Then by. select Level 2. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. Organize the data 28 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For And. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. select Number. For Field formatting. 29 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 27 Click OK. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. Verify that equals is selected. For Type. select Minimum Sprinklers. click Field Format. verify that (none) is selected. 30 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each space. Verify that Ascending is selected. For Formula. verify that (none) is selected. Create a calculated value parameter 25 Click Calculated Value. enter Area/130. verify that Common is selected. For Discipline. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. 408 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Verify that Formula is selected. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list).24 Select a field. verify that Number is selected. Under Level. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 130 square feet. select Level. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 26 In the Calculated Value dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes.

IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Next. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays. Click OK twice. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. In this exercise. sorted according to space number. Placing Sprinklers on page 410. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties.31 In the Format dialog. Finally. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. you created new views and modified view properties. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. For Units. 32 You can save the open file if you wish. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 409 . select Fixed. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. For Rounding. you created a Space Schedule for fire protection systems. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you place the wet system sprinklers. A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces. As a result. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 34 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal places. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select 2 decimal places. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project.

Place a sprinkler 1 In the Project Browser. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. click the Training Files icon. 4 In the Type Selector. After placing the initial sprinkler. Open the i Placing Sprinklers. You will use the schedule that you created in the previous exercise to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. select Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 1/2" Pendent. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). When there is a small misalignment. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. click Sprinkler. As you place the sprinklers.Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. When this happens. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the spaces on level 2. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 410 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 2 Enter ZR. 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. and double-click 2 .

select the sprinkler that you placed. Placing Sprinklers | 411 . You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Continue placing sprinklers 8 In the drawing area. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and that Copy is selected. You copy this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. 10 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection snap displays.6 With the view zoomed. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. click (Copy). The selected sprinkler displays in red. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. click to specify the copy start point. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. 11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. and click to place the sprinkler. 7 Click Modify on the Design Bar. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tile as shown.

12 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. 412 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. click to specify the copy end point. and after the intersection snap displays. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). The copy selection border follows the cursor.

Placing Sprinklers | 413 . 15 On the Edit toolbar. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 202. click to specify the copy start point. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Next. and select Multiple. verify Constrain is cleared. 17 In Office 201. and after the intersection snap displays. click (Copy).A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. Copy is selected. Copy and array sprinklers 13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately below Office 201). 16 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201.

and after the intersection snap displays. 414 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.18 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 202.

Placing Sprinklers | 415 . click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays.19 Move the cursor directly down.

The sprinklers are placed. 416 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

Placing Sprinklers | 417 . 23 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. because all of the sprinklers in Office 202 are equally spaced. For Move To. Verify that Constrain is cleared. select Last. Clear Group And Associate. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers.20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. it is an ideal situation to use an array. 22 On the Edit toolbar. you array the other Office 202 sprinklers. click (Array). you can use the Array tool to finish the job. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Next. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. 21 While pressing CTRL. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). Furthermore.

and after the intersection snap displays.NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. click to specify the array start point. An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. You first specify an array start point. click to specify the array end point as shown. 418 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202 sprinkler. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). to specify array end point. 25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. and after the intersection snap displays. creating an array is a 2-step process.

Placing Sprinklers | 419 .The Office 202 sprinklers are placed.

click (Copy). 26 Zoom out to view all 3 offices along the left wall. clear Multiple. 28 On the Edit toolbar. select both sprinklers in the corner office (Office 201). and after the mid point snap displays. 27 While pressing Ctrl. A border displays around the selected sprinklers indicating the copy selection. you place sprinklers in Office 203.Next. click to specify the copy start point. 30 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. 420 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 29 On the Options Bar.

and after the mid point snap displays. click to specify the copy end point.31 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 203. Placing Sprinklers | 421 .

enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. 422 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap.

You have now placed the sprinklers for 3 offices. You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array. Placing Sprinklers | 423 . 36 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Modify. click (Copy). Open 204. verify that Multiple is cleared. Open 204. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area. Next. 35 On the Edit toolbar. 34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler. 37 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. you place sprinklers in the large common space.

For Number. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. For Move To. and after the intersection snap displays. but creating an array is quicker. You could copy sprinklers. Next. 43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. 39 Click Modify. select 2nd. click (Array). Verify that Constrain is cleared. enter 6 for the number of arrays. click to place the sprinkler. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 42 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. 40 Select the sprinkler that you copied.38 Move the cursor to the right into Open 204 as shown. 424 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 41 On the Edit toolbar. The Office 203 sprinkler is copied to Open 204.

and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the array end point as shown.44 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. Placing Sprinklers | 425 . The array is created. Zoom out to display the array.

IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. For Number. enter 4 for number of arrays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. 45 While pressing CTRL. Next. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 426 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . you create multiple arrays based on this array. For Move To. Verify that Constrain is cleared. select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204 space. 46 On the Edit toolbar. click (Array). If you make a mistake placing the array. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. and after the intersection snap displays. verify that 2nd is selected. 47 On the Options Bar. undo the step and try again. 49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. 48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler as shown. click to specify end point for the second array.

click the check box associated with each warning. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors. and click Delete Checked to delete the 3 sprinklers. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. 51 Expand the 3 Warnings. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 204 is complete Placing Sprinklers | 427 .The arrays are created. click Expand. 50 In the Revit MEP 2009 dialog.

select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright. 58 In the Type Selector. Place non-hosted sprinklers 55 In the Project Browser. and double-click 2 . move the cursor to the approximate center of the space. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. click to place the sprinkler. click the Training Files icon. Load a new sprinkler family 52 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Sprinkler.rfa file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder. 428 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Edit Family on the Options Bar. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor.Next. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. first. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. To modify a family type. you need to load them in the project. 57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 54 Open the Sprinkler -Upright. you place a sprinkler in the Mechanical/Electrical space. and click Modify. The sprinkler family loads into the project. However. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser.Fire Prot to make it the active view. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). you will use a non-hosted sprinkler. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). Because this space does not have a ceiling. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 56 Enter ZR. 59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. 53 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

60 Right-click the sprinkler. and because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. for Offset. select Wall Faces 65 Click the upper wall face. click Dimension. 63 In the Project Browser. under Instance Parameters.The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and on the Options Bar. 64 On the Design Bar. Placing Sprinklers | 429 . NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. double-click 2 . and press Delete. 66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall. enter 10' 6". Unconstrain the sprinkler when deleting the dimension. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 62 Click OK. Do not click the vertical line that displays as the reference. then click the wall face of the lower wall. click the center of the sprinkler. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and notice that the sprinkler displays in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 67 Select the dimension. and move the dimension to the left. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the 2 .Ceiling Fire Prot view. as shown. and when a dot displays click to specify the center. Next you adjust the offset.Ceiling Fire Prot.

Use sprinkler type: Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 1/2" Pendent for all rooms. center the sprinkler between the right and left walls. NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. Round decimals up to the next whole number. then click Modify. You will create a Fire Protection Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise. 430 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Click to place the sprinklers on ceiling tile faces. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 69 Using the placement methods that you have learned.68 Using the same method. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions.

click to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment. double-click 2 . 71 Draw a pick box around the entire model. and click (Filter). click Check None.Fire Prot.70 In the Project Browser. 73 You can save the open file if you wish. then select Sprinklers. and on the toolbar. (Pin) 72 In the Filter dialog. Placing Sprinklers | 431 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 1 In the Project Browser. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.74 Click File menu ➤ Close. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. However.Fire Prot to make it the active view. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. In the next exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Unlike logical connections (systems). In this exercise. Open the i Connecting Sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Then you simplify the layout using tools from the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar to modify pipe branches after converting the initial layout to piping. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Connecting the Sprinklers on page 432. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. 432 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. After creating the logical connection. and physically with piping. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. and double-click 2 . 75 Proceed to the next exercise. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.

and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder.Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Filter box. If the System Browser does not respond. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. select Sprinklers. 4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. then press F9. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 8 On the Options Bar. Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211. click System Browser. All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. click in the drawing area to make it active. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. and click OK. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. click Check None. Connecting the Sprinklers | 433 . 6 On the Options Bar. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. and display pinned and in red.

The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar.The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. and click Select. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. Next. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. and a piping layout preview displays. named Fire Protection Wet 1. all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. select an initial piping layout. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. right-click Fire Protection Wet. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. press Tab. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. 434 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser. expand Piping. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. In the System Browser.

and on the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. and select solution 4. 21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model. and on the Options Bar. click Settings. The layout path solution displays. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Place Base. verify that Main is selected. and for Offset. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. (Layout Path) button is available on the Options Bar whenever a system component 13 On the Design Bar.NOTE The is selected. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 435 . these settings will convert the base component to a 6" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 23 On the Design Bar. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 22 On the Options Bar. 14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. enter -12' 0". IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and click to place the base component as shown. When the layout is finished. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right keyboard arrow keys. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. verify that 6"150 mm is specified for D. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. select Branch. 18 Click OK. click Solutions. Click (Previous Solution). click Solutions.

On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 26 Select the vertical layout path segment. 436 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 25 Zoom in on the vertical main.Next. you modify the selected layout. click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. Modify the layout 24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. In general.

28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211. Connecting the Sprinklers | 437 .27 Drag the parallel movement control to the left to a point to the right of the doorway for Office 216. and midway between the sprinklers above the office as shown.

30 Select the horizontal branch pipe. feeding the sprinkler in Office 203. (tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below 32 Scroll to the left. and drag the down to merge it with the horizontal piping below. 438 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 31 Drag the it. select the horizontal branch again. (elbow junction control) The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area. as shown.29 Drag the parallel movement control down until the pipe merges with the horizontal piping to the left.

you have been using parallel movements to combine piping. Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping. Connecting the Sprinklers | 439 .33 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. 37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above. Next you combine the piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately. However. 35 On the toolbar. So far. In general. it is an opportunity to merge the piping into a shared branch. as shown. 36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler. 34 Select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in the left office. You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools. there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths. click (Thin Lines). Thin lines make it easier to see the various drag controls when using junction and elbow controls.

or manually modify the pipe. and drag the the branch piping. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. Either relocate the system components. (elbow junction control) up to combine 39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. select a different layout solution.38 Select the horizontal branch again. or that offset elevations are incorrect. click Finish Layout. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. 440 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.

including the cross and transitions from the main piping. and verify that (Auto Connect) is selected on the Options Bar. click in Office 211. 43 Press Delete. and the sprinkler in the open area. as shown. 41 On the Options Bar. click (Filter). on the Options Bar. (Connect Into). 45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays. click draw pipe. then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler. right-click the connector at the open end.Continue combining piping 40 Zoom in on Office 211. click to specify the end point. 42 In the Filter dialog. 44 Select the horizontal pipe. 46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted. as shown. and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler 47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown. and click OK. Connecting the Sprinklers | 441 . draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. clear Sprinklers.

and drag the top connector up to connect with the horizontal piping in the open area. and drag the connector to the right to connect with the vertical pipe as shown. 49 Draw a pick box around the horizontal piping and fittings between the sprinklers in Office 216 and the main in Server Room 215. including the pipe and the tee as shown. 51 Press Delete. 442 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .48 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. 53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216. as shown. Reconnect the sprinklers in Office 214 and 216 52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216. 50 While pressing Ctrl. select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214. and press Delete.

■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 443 . 55 On the Design Bar. then drag the preview to the connector snap on the right-most sprinkler.54 Zoom in on the office in the lower-right corner. and click to make the connection to the sprinkler. Drag the preview down. Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler. click Pipe. Click Modify. verify that (Auto Connect) is selected. click to specify the end point for the pipe. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal pipe.

On the Options Bar.■ Select the sprinkler to the left. 444 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . ■ Reconnect the piping for Office 214 to the main 56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215. and click the horizontal pipe as shown. click (Connect Into). (Trim/Extend). and on the toolbar click 57 Click each of the open-ended pipes.

In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.An elbow is inserted to complete the connection. checked connectivity. and converted pipe fittings. you add the sprinklers in the upper half of the model to the existing wet system. and press Tab twice. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 445. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 2 Zoom in. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 445 . In this exercise. indicating connectivity throughout the system. Open the i Completing the Wet System.Fire Prot view. Next. you create the dry fire protection system. click the Training Files icon. After creating the system. and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. 61 Click File menu ➤ Close. 60 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and double-click the 2 . Check pipe connectivity 59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system. 1 In the Project Browser. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and then you create piping to physically connect them.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. The entire system should be highlighted. 58 Click Modify.

The Edit System toolbar displays providing system editing tools. radiators.Fire Prot view. and number of elements in the system. fitting. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. and pipe or duct is created. or sprinkler in the current wet system. 446 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 5 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the upper half of the model. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. select a pipe segment. and AC units. such as VAV boxes. boilers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. mechanical equipment. 4 In the 2 . IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). you can select the pipe or duct. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). System tools display on the Options Bar. air terminals. and so on) are logically connected by a system. system equipment.3 Click the plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a cross.

8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building. For System Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add To System). Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 447 . This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. verify that 30 is specified. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. verify that None is specified. For Number of Elements. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). click 7 On the Options Bar. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. For System Equipment. 9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected.6 On the Edit System toolbar. Select Multiple. You cannot select them.

12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model. you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the selections. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. and click Modify. (Layout 448 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . verify that Solutions is selected. and on the Options Bar. for Solution Type. On the Options Bar. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor. click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the system. 11 On the Edit System toolbar. Number of Elements now displays as 65 (sprinklers) in the system. click Finish to finish editing the system.The selected sprinklers display in red. solution 1 3. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. click Paths). select Network. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. On the Options Bar. 10 NOTE When you use multiple selections.

and drag the tee junction control to the intersection to the left as shown. and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the branch piping as shown.The layout automatically provides a path from the upper layout to the cross created earlier. 17 Select the vertical branch again. 16 Select the vertical pipe to the lower sprinkler in the corner office (201). Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 449 . 15 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the model.

Click the tee junction control again and continue the adjustment. click Finish Layout. 20 On the Design Bar. drag each end of the branch to the left to combine it with the piping to the sprinkler just to above. as shown. 19 Using the same method. The tee junction control will stop at the junction of the tee from the main piping. The piping for the upper half of the model displays.18 Scroll to the right and select the branch to the lower-right sprinkler in Office 208. 450 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 215. and press Tab 3 times. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. In the next exercise. a valve would isolate the dry system from the wet system. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. and the pipes for this system would not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 451. For this exercise. In this exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise.Check pipe connectivity 21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell. 22 You can save the open file if you wish. you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. The entire system should be highlighted. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. After creating the system. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. As with the wet system. it is enough show how the system is created without adding a valve. indicating connectivity throughout the system. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 451 . In an actual dry system. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. and checked connectivity. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you create the dry fire protection system.

click the Training Files icon. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 216.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Open the i Creating the Dry System. If necessary. and double-click 2 . press Tab until the sprinkler displays on the status bar at the lower left corner of the window. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Place sprinklers 2 Zoom in to view the 3 spaces at the bottom of the model.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. 452 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Be careful to select only the sprinkler.

as shown. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 453 . Verify that Copy is selected. click (Copy). 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify. then move the cursor diagonally to the upper-right. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. click to specify the copy start point. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. along the same horizontal ceiling grid. 7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215.4 On the Edit toolbar.

select Sprinkler . The system is created and listed in the System Browser. click System Browser. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Create the dry system 9 While pressing CTRL. The System Browser opens.Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). For Slope. verify that 1/2" is selected. For Offset.Dry . expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. 14 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red.Pendent . click Pipe. enter 1/8" / 12".Hosted : 1/2" Dry Pendent. click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign the sprinklers to it. Create the dry system piping 15 In the Project Browser. Confirm and validate the system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select both Server Room 215 sprinklers. 17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Selector. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. 16 Zoom in on Server Room 215. 19 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 454 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 13 In the System Browser. and click Select The selected system displays in red.Fire Prot to make it the active view. double-click 2 . you change the sprinkler type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. verify that 9' 0" is specified.

22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 455 . Do not connect to the upper right sprinkler. and click. as shown. when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays. to specify a starting point for the piping 21 Draw the pipe preview straight down to a point even with the lower-left sprinkler. click to connect the pipe.20 Click the horizontal pipe directly above the upper-right sprinkler.

select Show categories from all disciplines. All categories are selected except the Lines category. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. All categories are cleared. The pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper-right sprinkler. under Instance Parameters. and clear the Lines category. 28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines. and zoom in on the dry fire protection system. and click View Properties. select any category. 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Next. 24 In the Project Browser. on the Model Categories tab. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. expand Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 3D Views. Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view. click All. click All. and clear a check mark from any category. click None. as shown. 456 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. click Edit.23 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. 25 Right-click an empty area in the drawing area. You can confirm this in the 3D view or by checking connectivity. and double-click 3D.

and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. To follow good design practice. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. and all pipe fittings are automatically added.30 Select the unconnected sprinkler. click . You can click the slope control to change the reference end for the slope. 32 Zoom the view. and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. The slope value displays next to the slope control. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 457 .

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. and double-click 3D to make the view active. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 215. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. the active view is tiled to the left. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. 2 If necessary. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. checked pipe connectivity. In this exercise.Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 33 Zoom out to display the entire model. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. highlight a pipe segment in the dry system. you placed dry system sprinklers. indicating that they are connected. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. TIP When you tile 2 views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. First. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session.Fire Prot to make the view active.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Additionally. Modifying Pipe Diameters on page 458. and press TAB 3 times. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. You have completed the dry fire protection system. Then. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. and double-click 2. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. Open the i Modifying Pipe Diameters. 458 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon.

Fire Prot view. width. or width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. Changing the diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. In the 2. height. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 8 In the Filter dialog. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection piping. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. click . and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately.You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. width. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 459 . 7 On the Options Bar. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. and click OK. or height. click Check None. NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter.

and press TAB twice. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. and while pressing SHIFT. 12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment. for D: (diameter). 10 On the Options Bar. verifying that it is connected. All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 1 inch diameter except for the supply piping. 460 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select 1". the elbow and the horizontal pipe to the main piping to remove them from the selection.9 Click in the 3D view to make it active. select the supply pipe in the stairwell. zoom in on the supply pipe in the stairwell. 11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 1 inch diameter on the Options Bar.

click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving.Modify the diameter of the main 13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 461 . draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. If branch segments are selected. TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model. select the model. and on the toolbar. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection.

14 With the main selected. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. 462 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . the pipe fittings. while pressing CTRL. and the supply pipe.

NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings. (Filter) to select only 16 Double-click the 3D view. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Validate the pipe run geometry. especially around the pipe fittings. The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire protection systems. and on the View Control Bar. for D: 6". use the pipes and pipe fittings. select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main. 15 On the Options Bar. for Detail Level. Sprinklers Serviced 1. Modify the diameter of branch pipes 20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select Fine. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. and for Model Graphics Style. select Shading with Edges. for D. 17 In the 3D view. select 4".The main piping is selected and displays in red. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 463 . 2 3 4.

This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office. select Shading with Edges. select Fine and for Model Graphics Style. Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection. select 2". 22 Enter ZR. 24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as shown. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements. and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215). and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 offices in the building. The specifications requires a diameter of 2" for this pipe segment. 464 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 26 Select the next pipe segment and tee to the right. for D:. The pipe diameter is modified. for Detail. 23 On the View Control Bar. 25 On the Options Bar.21 Click in the 2 .Fire Prot view to make it active. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers.

for D:. 27 On the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 465 . Next.This segment services 4 sprinklers. 28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view. It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view. select 1 1/2". 29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch. zoom in on the piping to Office 216. you continue to modify the pipe branch. for D: select 1 1/2". and on the Options Bar.

37 On the Options Bar. Click Tags.30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch. Tag the pipes 31 In the 2 Fire Prot view. and after the segment highlights. 36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main. click Tag ➤ By Category. 34 In the Tag dialog. They display only in the view in which they were placed. for Pipes. click to place the tag. 33 On the Options Bar. select Leader. verify that Pipe Size Tag is loaded. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. and on the Options Bar. zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step. Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. press Tab until the pipe is highlighted place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. 32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Clear Leader. you place a tag and include a leader line. for D: select 1 1/4". 38 Place the cursor over the vertical supply pipe in the stairwell. NOTE Tags are view specific. 35 Click OK. 466 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . under Category.

and finish tagging the pipes. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 467 . Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. Next.39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). and finish placing the pipe tags. 40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. Sprinklers Serviced 1. 2 3 4.

Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You added tags the pipes. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. You can save the open file if you wish.42 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this tutorial. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. The completed fire protection system is included in the i Completed Fire Protection System. 468 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. For additional practice. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.

medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular 469 . you use the Family Editor to modify and create tags and annotation symbols.Creating Revit MEP Content 9 This tutorial expands your knowledge of the Family Editor by introducing several unique features in Revit MEP. you should have a working knowledge of Revit MEP and experience with the actual components that you will be modeling. duct fittings. it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline. Before using this tutorial. pipe fittings. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. After learning to modify an existing family. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family. as after this selection is made. Revit MEP Content The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections. In this tutorial. but also to understand how the settings in the Family Editor affect the family. telephone. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly. In the third lesson. Pipe connectors are used for piping. not only for the geometry. Family Editor Creating a family requires careful thought. ■ ■ NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. including power. ■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork. and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. alarm systems and others. you begin by modifying existing families to create new types. and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids. you create a new lighting fixture and 2 pipe fittings. Steam. Revit MEP operation and the behavior of your components depends to a great extent on how you create specific components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components.

and for Current. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then load it into the project. 6 Click OK to close the Project Units window. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family. the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space.Downblast . click the Training Files icon. open it in the Family Editor. 470 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall design. You can modify an existing component.rfa. there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of attempting to create a single family with types to address every application. Set project units 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and save the family as Exhaust Ventilator . Finally. Save a copy of the family 1 Click File ➤ Save As. Modifying Families In this lesson. The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. For example. Map parameters Create multiple types within a family. navigate to a folder of your choice. 7 Save the family. or plumbing component. and click OK. you may want to create multiple types within the existing family instead of creating a new family. If you can find a component that is similar to the family that you want. 5 In the Format dialog. electrical. Modifying a Fan Family In this exercise you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modify an existing family. although it may be easier to modify an existing family. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor Exhaust Ventilator . instead of creating a new one. Define shared parameters. select Electrical. At times. 2 In the Save As dialog.rfa. Create formulas for parameters. modify it as needed. You can create a component from scratch. There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. for Rounding.Downblast.mechanical. you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families. Place connectors. it is easier to modify a component. click the Format column. for Discipline. 4 In the Project Units dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1 decimal place.

select the Shared parameter option. 15 For Name. enter Motor HP For Discipline. enter Common For Type. Shared_Parameters) for the shared parameter file. and click Select. under Parameters. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 17 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 12 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click the Shared parameter option. create additional shared parameters with the following properties: Name Voltage Motor FLA Power Phase Number of Poles Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Electrical Type Electrical Potential Current Power Integer Number of Poles 20 Click OK. and click Create. select Motor FLA. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 23 In the Family Types dialog. and click Save. NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this tutorial. Click Yes. you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous step. you will be prompted to choose a file from another project or to create a new file. select the Type option. click New. Modifying a Fan Family | 471 . and click Select. for Group parameter under. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. select the Electrical Engineering. enter a File name (for example. 19 Using the same method. enter Text 18 Click OK. 11 If you have not already created a shared parameter file. and click OK. and click OK. To reuse this tutorial. click Add. click New. 13 Browse to a folder. click Family Types 9 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. under Groups. click Add. Add shared parameters to the Family Type 21 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameters.Create Shared Parameters 8 On the Design Bar. 16 Under Parameters. 14 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 24 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter MEP. The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category.

1 Ph 2 HP . 32 Specify the following values for the shared parameters in the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage = 115 Phase = 1 Number of Poles = 1 Motor FLA = 4. select MEP. 472 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . under Parameter Data. 31 Click OK. create additional Family Types with the following parameter values: Name 1 HP .25 In the Shared Parameters dialog.460 V . as defined below: Parameter Phase Number of Poles Motor HP Power Group Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Type Type Type Type Create a parameter formula to calculate power 28 In the Formula column for Power.5 4. for Parameter Group. 35 Save the family.3 Ph 3 HP . select Voltage. select the Type option.1 Ph. click New. 30 For Name.3 Ph Voltage 208 208 460 Phase 1 3 3 Number of Poles Motor FLA 2 3 3 8.208 V . and click OK. 27 Using the same method. enter the following formula: Voltage * Motor FLA * sqrt(if(Phase = 3. select Electrical Engineering.115 V .208 V . 1)) NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters you created. 3. and click OK.8 7. 33 Using the same method. Create New Family Types 29 Under Family Types.4 Motor HP = 1/6 The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified. 26 In the Parameter Properties. under Parameters. for Group parameter under.8 Motor HP 1 2 3 34 Click OK. enter 1/6 HP . add the following shared parameters to the family type.

telephone. system type. 40 Click Modify Modifying a Fan Family | 473 . while pressing Shift. TIP You can also hold the right mouse button. press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of the fan is highlighted. select Power . click Electrical Connector. Click and drag the View Cube at the upper right corner of the view to spin the ventilator as shown. number of poles and the same voltage specified. including power. 37 On the Design Bar. See Connector Placement on page 567. The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in a power system. alarm systems and others. Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane. See Connectors on page 561. Connections between components in a power system must have connectors with the same. and dragging the cursor to spin a model. and verify that is selected. NOTE If necessary.Balanced. 38 On the Options Bar. 39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on the center of the face.Add an electrical connector 36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems.

click Load into Projects. 52 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Downblast. click Family Types. 42 In the Family Types dialog. click . select Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. 43 Select the Electrical connector created in the previous section.rvt. . 55 On the Design Bar. select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph. click 46 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. click list. specify an associated family parameter for the following parameters: Parameter Number of Poles Apparent Load Associated (shared) Parameter Number of Poles Power 48 Under Electrical Loads. 59 Move the cursor into the drawing area and click to add the Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. 56 The i Sample Project. 49 Click OK. 64 Save the family. and on the Options Bar.rvt displays in the drawing area. select Voltage. and in the Type Selector. 57 In the Project Browser. 50 Save the family. for Load Classification. click Mechanical Equipment. select 3 HP . 63 Click OK. and observe the values in the Type Parameters 62 For Type. 474 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 47 Using the same method. Flex the part 51 Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa to make the family the active view. and double-click 2 .Mech. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 53 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.Map Parameter Values to Connector 41 On the Design Bar. It also demonstrates the use of shared parameters and parameter mapping. 61 Select the fan. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. (It is not necessary to save the i Sample Project. select HVAC. for Voltage.3 Ph. The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types. click the Training Files icon. and click OK.) 60 Click Modify.rvt file. 54 Click Window menu ➤ Exhaust Ventilator . 58 On the Mechanical Design Bar. (The exact location is not important.460 V .) Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family This exercise demonstrates using various settings on the electrical connector to define a fan powered box with variable power requirements for electric heat and motor size. and again observe the Type Parameter values. 44 On the Options Bar. in the = column.

It this is not the case. under Parameters. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 470. you will need to complete that exercise to create shared parameters that are used in this exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. for Parameter group. enter Apparent Power Phase 1. and click Select. select MEP. Open the family and create parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Parameters. 4 Click Yes when prompted to open the family for editing. select the Shared parameter option. click Add. click New. go back and complete the previous Modifying a Fan Family exercise. select Electrical. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. select MEP. For Discipline. The MEP group was created in the Modifying a Fan Family exercise and the parameters created in that exercise are listed under Parameters. and double-click 1 . 8 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click the Training Files icon. For Type.Power. 10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Edit Family. 2 Select the VAV box. 6 In the Family Types dialog.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Parameter group. 5 Click Family Types. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 475 .rvt. NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Power. 9 Click Edit. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.

Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering group in the Family Types dialog. for Group parameter under. and click OK. create the following additional shared parameters as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor On Phase Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Type Power Power Power Integer 14 Click OK.13 Using the same method. click Add. 17 In the Family Types dialog. select Electrical Engineering. under Parameters. and click OK. 21 Using the same method. select Electrical Engineering. Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter name. enter 480. select the Shared parameter option. For Phase. select the Instance option. select Apparent Power Phase 1. for Group parameter under. as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor FLA Motor HP Motor On Phase Number of Poles Phase Voltage Group parameter under Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Instance Instance Type Type Instance Type Type Type 22 In the Family Types dialog. enter 3. 19 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. 476 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . add the following shared parameters to the family type. 23 In the Formula column. select Apparent Power Phase 2. and click OK 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog.6 inch Inlet is selected for Name. 15 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select the Instance option. specify formulas for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Voltage. and click OK. verify that Size 2 . and click Select. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Data.

27 In the Family Types dialog. create additional types. Place connector and map parameters 31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown. enter 3. enter 1/6. For Motor HP.6 inch Inlet VAV: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. For Motor On Phase. enter Size 3 . enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2. For Apparent Power Phase 2.4 29 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog. specify the following parameters for the Size 3 . in the Value column.3. enter 1. Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered when you created the parameters. and click OK. For Motor FLA. For Motor On Phase.9 3. ■ ■ NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. For Motor HP. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 3. 0 VA).8 inch Inlet. 28 Using the same method. 25 Under Family Types.■ For Apparent Power Phase 1. 24 Under Electrical Engineering. Motor FLA * 277 V.8 inch Inlet type: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. enter 1/4. enter 1. click new.2 5. Motor FLA * 277 V. 0 VA). 30 Save the family as Parallel Fan Powered VAV.rfa. For Motor FLA. Motor FLA * 277 V. For Apparent Power Phase 3. enter 2. specify the following parameter values for the Size 2 . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 477 . 0 VA). enter 1.2. 26 In the Name dialog. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1. enter 3. and specify the parameters for each size listed below: Name Number of Poles 3 3 3 Motor On Motor HP Phase (Default) 1 1 1 1/3 1/2 3/4 Motor FLA Size 4 – 10 inch Inlet Size 5 – 12 inch Inlet Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet 2.

■ 478 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select ■ ■ For Apparent Load Phase 1. and verify that is selected. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 35 Click Modify. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. specify values for the following parameters: ■ For Number of Poles. click Electrical Connector. select Number of Poles. and click OK. For Apparent Load Phase 2. and click to add the connector on the face. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog.Unbalanced. click in the column. select Apparent Power Phase 1. select Power . click in the column. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Voltage. and on the Options Bar.32 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 34 Highlight the large face on the controls box. 33 On the Options Bar. select Apparent Power Phase 2. For Voltage. 36 Select the connector. and click OK. column. click in the column. and click OK. click .

The loads on phases A. and double-click 1 . select Apparent Power Phase 3. 46 Select the VAV box. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. 51 Click OK. enter 3000. and on the Options Bar. for Panel. click in the column. and C are 2512. For System Type. enter 2. 1000. select Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet. 43 Select the VAV box. and click OK. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ For Motor On Phase. For Electric Heat Power. 50 Select panel HA. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog.Power. . verify that Power . 53 In the Element Properties dialog. respectively.Unbalanced is selected. 52 Select the VAV box. click 44 Click (Create Power Circuit). For Load Classification. and click Yes. 42 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. click (Edit Circuit on Panel). select panel HA. click Load into Projects. and click . for Type. select Override parameter values of existing types. B. ■ ■ 38 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. and click . and specify the following parameters: ■ For Motor On Phase. 47 Verify that Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 2 . Flex the family 40 On the Design Bar. 49 Click OK.6 inch Inlet is selected in the Type Selector. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 479 . enter 1. 41 If prompted. and 1000.■ For Apparent Load Phase 3. and on the Options Bar. 45 Click Modify. 39 Save the family. enter HVAC.

Mech. and C have updated to 4819. and click Yes. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click Load into Projects. respectively. 63 On the Design Bar. 67 On the Options Bar. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a supply air system 65 In the Project Browser. enter 11000. 4027. and on the Options Bar. B. 62 Click OK. 60 Select the supply air connector. and double-click 1 . 66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room. click . 55 Click Modify. 56 Select panel HA.rfa. select 480 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . verify that Calculated is selected for Flow Configuration. 54 Click OK. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components. as shown. and on the Options Bar. click .■ For Electric Heat Power. 64 If prompted. and 3667. 57 Click OK. 59 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so you can see the air supply connector. (Create (Select Equipment for System). The loads on phases A. select Override parameter values of existing types. under Mechanical. Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV 58 Click Window menu ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV. When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. click the VAV box. and on the Options Bar click Supply Air System). and in the drawing area. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area.

verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. 70 Click OK 71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. For Offset enter 9' 0". verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Offset enter 9' 0".Round is selected. and click Settings.68 Click (Layout Paths). Ductwork is created for the selected solution. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. For Flex Duct Type. Branch ■ ■ ■ ■ For Duct Type. enter 6' 0". click Design Bar. and on the Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 481 . For Maximum Flex Duct Length. click Finish Layout. to select layout 6 of 6. 69 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. verify the following Main and Branch settings: Main ■ ■ For Duct Type.

4 specified for Flow and the other with 0. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1.4 X 20 gpm). and select Properties. 77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV. 73 In the System Browser. and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 600 CFM. and press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal. 80 Click OK.6 X 20 gpm).6 specified for Flow. Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. When Flow Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active. This allows specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem.72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser. the new sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals. and select Properties. For example. expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV: Size 2 . 79 In the Element Properties dialog. The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component. 78 Again. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow. 74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 600 CFM (4 X 150 CFM). The Flow Factor parameter is specified as a value between 0 and 1. 482 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 75 In the Element Properties dialog. 76 Click OK. Using the combination of Preset and System settings on connectors lets you distribute flow according to the demands of a particular space. a boiler may have its supply preset to 20 gpm (system supply = 20 gpm) and the connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System. and the other would receive a flow of 12 gpm (0. enter 300. with the total for all downstream components equal to 1. but one with 0. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 750 CFM. In this case the first downstream zone would receive a flow of 8 gpm (0.6 inch Inlet VAV.

3 On the Options Bar. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 483 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Loads.rfa. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Number of Poles. you modify a 208V/3Ph panel to create a 240V/3Ph family. In the first section. under Electrical . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. To create unequal percentages for several downstream subsystems.208V MCB . enter 2. all instances of the family in a project will have the same factor. click . For Voltage. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorLighting and Appliance Panelboard . and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rfa. enter 240. and then you use the new families in a project.NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector.Surface. The final section demonstrates how to load. Modify an existing panel family 1 In the Project Browser. you modify existing electrical equipment families to create new families. select the connector. and in the following section you modify a 480V/3Ph primary transformer to create a 480V/1Ph to 240V/1Ph secondary transformer. 7 In the Save As dialog.240V MCB . 5 Click OK. insert. click the Training Files icon. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the drawing area. you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and connect components of the newly created families in a simple project. Modifying Electrical Equipment In this exercise. 81 Close the Family and Sample Project files. and then map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project.Surface.

verify that 15 kVA is selected. 25 In the Save As dialog. 29 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. enter 0' 6 1/2" For Height. Load the new panel and transformer families into a project 27 Click File menu ➤ Open. 484 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 3 kVA. delete all of the remaining types. Modify an existing transformer family 9 Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify an existing family type. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a new family type. you use the modified families in a project. right-click the Design Bar.rfa. click the Training Files icon. for Name. 17 Under Electrical. 30 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. 13 For Name. 21 Under Electrical.480V Primary. and click Electrical. 23 Click OK. 15 Using the same method. 18 Click Apply. enter 0' 10 1/2" For Width. Otherwise. 12 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Next. 19 Under Family Types. 16 In the Family Types dialog. NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 11 Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorDry Type Transformers . click Electrical Equipment. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Single Phase Transformer . verify the following: ■ ■ Primary Voltage is 480. click the Training Files icon.00 V. for Name.5 kVA. Primary Number of Poles is 2. Notice that the new family type is selected for Name. and click OK.8 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Delete. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. for Primary Number of Poles.rvt. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Length. 28 In the left pane of the Open dialog. except for 15 kVA. click Family Types.rfa. enter 0' 8 5/8" NOTE You must enter 0 for the foot value. click New. Next. 14 Under Family Types.480-208-120V . In the following sections. 22 Under Dimensions. 24 Click File ➤ Save As. the inch value will be applied to the foot value. select 112. enter 2.NEMA Type 2. 20 In the Name dialog.

You can also click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 32 In the Open dialog.480V Primary. do the following: ■ Place a Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel on the wall to the right of the first panel.Surface : 100A. Test the new electrical equipment in a project 33 In the Project Browser.240V MCB . 37 Using the same method. 34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar.Power to make it the active view. and click Open.rfa. 36 Move the cursor over the wall. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 485 . and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. navigate to the folder where you saved the new families. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .31 On the Options Bar. TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult. click Electrical Equipment.240V MCB . select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Surface. and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall. then while pressing CTRL.rfa and Single Phase Transformer . TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment in the Project Browser. click to place the panel on the wall as shown. The new families are loaded into the project. 35 In the Type Selector. click Load. NOTE The panel is a wall-hosted family—it can only be placed on a wall.

select 480 Wye. For Phase. select Distribution Systems. 45 Click Add. do the following: For Secondary Distribution System. 48 In the drawing area. Create a new distribution system 43 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. enter DP. for Panel Name. 486 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select 3. 42 In the Element Properties dialog.Loads. enter 480 Wye. verify that Single is selected.480V Primary : 15kVA transformer on the wall between the panels. For Wires. Create a system 39 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel. select 120/240 Single. 41 With the panel selected. select 277. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Click Modify. For Panel Name. L-G Voltage. 46 In the right pane. select 480. and click OK. Click OK. for Distribution Sys. 40 On the Options Bar. click Electrical Settings. you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer. under Electrical . click . You can also click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. under Electrical . Next. For Distribution System Types.■ Place a Single Phase Transformer . select 480/277 Wye. 49 On the Options Bar. enter T-LC. For L-L Voltage. select the Single Phase Transformer. 47 Click OK. 44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.Loads. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. A new row is added in the right pane.

The DP panel is logically connected to the transformer 54 Click Modify. ■ 57 In the Element Properties dialog.51 In the drawing area. click 60 On the Options Bar.Surface : 100A (LC) panel. Notice that 480 Wye is selected for Distribution Sys on the Options Bar.Surface : 100A panel. 56 On the Options Bar.240V MCB . and click OK. click to create a new circuit. 53 On the Options Bar. select T-LC. enter LC. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 487 . for Panel. for Panel Name. Click .Loads. under Electrical . on the Options Bar. 61 Close the Simple Room without saving. This indicates that the transformer is associated with that distribution system. . 59 On the Options Bar. click a new circuit.240V MCB . This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer. and on the Options Bar. 55 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select the transformer. do the following: ■ For Distribution Sys. do the following: ■ ■ (Create Power Circuit) to create Click (Select a Panel for the Circuit). For Panel. 52 With the transformer selected. 58 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select DP. select 120/240 Single.

Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorCommercial . and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in the view. click Pipe Connector. and on the View Control Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. Select the wall. (Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line. 5 On the Options Bar. and verify that is selected. 488 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . However.Modifying a Water Closet This exercise demonstrates adding piping connectors to a water closet family and setting typical connector properties for domestic cold water and sanitary systems. for System Type. so you must hide the wall in the view. 3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented as shown. click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element.Toilet .Wall Mount Flush Valve. 4 On the Design Bar. click 2 On the View Control Bar. select Sanitary. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component.rfa. you will be working at the back of the toilet.

10 Click . 8 Select the connector. 9 If the arrow is pointing in toward the toilet bowl. and click to add the connector. 7 Click Modify. not the flow direction. click pointing away from the bowl. and move the cursor over the larger of the 2 round extrusions at the back of the toilet as shown. Modifying a Water Closet | 489 . The connector direction determines the direction from which it will accept connections from other components. so that the connector direction is The arrow indicates the connector direction.6 Zoom in. highlight the round face.

For Flow Direction. add a Domestic Cold Water system Piping Connector. and click Modify. select In.11 In the Element Properties dialog. Clear Allow Slope Adjustments 490 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 12 Click OK. For Flow Configuration. click ■ ■ ■ to specify connector direction. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Radius. 13 Using the same method. select Out. in the location shown. . Select Allow Slope Adjustments For Fixture Units. enter 0' 1 1/2". 14 Select the connector. enter 4. select Fixture Units. specify values for the following parameters: For Radius. click 15 On the Options Bar. For Flow Direction. enter 0 3/4".

and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans.5.■ ■ For Flow Configuration. and in the Save As dialog. For Fixture Units. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. you modify a diffuser tag family to provide a type mark instead of the default instance mark. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Click File ➤ Save As. 1 In the Project Browser.rfa.Ceiling Mech. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. 17 Click OK. enter 2. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Toilet . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family | 491 . select Fixture Units. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.Commercial Wall Mount Flush Valve. click the Training Files icon. 2 In the drawing area. select a diffuser tag.

Each label is associated with a parameter. select Type Mark. 6 Under Category Parameters. and click Yes when asked to open the diffuser tag for editing.3 On the Options Bar. and click from label). 4 Select the top label (1i). select Mark. 5 In the Edit Label dialog. under Label Parameters. The diffuser tag is composed of two labels separated by a horizontal line. The sample text changes to 1t. and click 7 Click OK. click Edit Label. click Edit Family. 492 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and on the Options Bar. (Remove parameter (Add parameter to label). The Family Editor opens.

If more than one project is open. S-1. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family In this exercise.8 On the Design Bar. 9 When prompted to overwrite the existing Diffuser Tag. without saving. click the Training Files icon. and the return air diffuser type. in the Load into Projects dialog. click Yes. you modify a light fixture tag family to include panel and circuit information. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 493 . select i Sample Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family.rvt. R-1. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. click Load into Projects. and click OK. The project becomes active and the diffuser tag updates to display the supply air terminal type. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project.rvt.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. select a light fixture tag. 5 On the Edit toolbar. and double-click 1 . click Multiple. 4 In the drawing area.1 In the Project Browser. 8 Move the cursor straight down. The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter. enter 0 1/8". 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the midpoint of the label to specify the copy start point. and after listening dimensions display. click (Copy). and press Enter to specify the copy end point. select the 1i label. and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag for editing. click Edit Family. The Family Editor opens.Lighting. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 In the drawing area. 494 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

The label is copied. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 495 . 9 Repeat the previous steps to create a second copy of the label.

10 Click Modify. select Type Mark. enter PNL in the Sample Value column. 16 Click OK. under Label Parameters. 14 Under Category Parameters. and on the Options Bar. 12 Select the middle label. for the Panel parameter. You need to modify this box. and click parameter from label). click Edit Label. and click (Add parameter to label). 496 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 11 Select the bottom line of the box. The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter. (Remove 15 Under Label Parameters. Notice that the bounding box contains only the first label. select Panel. 13 In the Edit Label dialog. Next. and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels. you modify 2 labels. The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor.

and click Yes. select i Sample Project. select Circuit Number. in the Load into Projects dialog. 19 If prompted. and click OK. If more than one project is open. and click (Remove parameter from label) (Add parameter to label). enter CKT in the Sample Value column The 3 light fixture labels are as shown. ■ ■ Under Category Parameters. select Override parameter values of existing types. modify the bottom label with the following Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Label Parameters. Load the light fixture tag family into a project 18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. and the light fixture tags update to display the panel and circuit information.rvt.17 Using the same method. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 497 . and click For the Circuit Number parameter. select Type Mark. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are.

6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. or profile). The process of creating a component family includes the following steps: 1 Select the appropriate family template.20 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. it is important that you start your lighting family with one of these templates. If you expect to render your lighting designs. Creating Families In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. model. The hosting of a component is defined by the template used when the family is originally created. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. In some cases. There are various light fixture family templates available in Revit MEP. without saving. you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture. titleblock. Creating a Light Fixture Family In this exercise you create an 8” ceiling hosted recessed downlight. the template also defines characteristics of how the family works. 9 Save the newly-defined family. Templates also define the type of family (annotation. such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. You cannot change these characteristics after you have created the family. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. For example. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. as they have reference 498 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry.

rft) and linear (Linear Lighting Fixture*. and Light Source Elevation.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path.ies files from the Web for their fixtures. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. ceiling hosted.ies file is not used for rendering.rft. Additionally. The . there are lighting templates for non-hosted. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). a spot fixture. or a generic fixture. select Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. (This is the location from which the . these planes are Light Source Axis (F/B). you must determine the correct path to the IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. This can be shortened or lengthened as necessary to model the linear lighting fixture. select the Normal option Clear the Shared option NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. and double-click Front. such as Generic Model face based. Locate IES data file 1 Using Windows Explorer.ies files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. Each family has additional parameters depending on whether it is a linear fixture.rft) lighting templates. and move with.ies file. For generic (Lighting Fixture*. For spot light templates (Spot Lighting Fixture*. When you use a spot light template. select Lighting Fixtures.rft. This file contains engineering data that can be used to calculate the coefficient of utilization of the fixture.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\IES folder. 7 Click OK. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. and wall hosted objects. the family will have the additional parameters: Spot Beam Angle. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. Spot Tilt Angle. Lighting manufacturers often allow you to download .rft). 5 Under Family Category. 6 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the Always Vertical option Select Light Source For Part Type. 3 In the New dialog. When creating a lighting family. and copy the Ltl9815. The Linear template contains a model line representing the light source along the F/B axis. objects in the linked file. Spot Spread Angle. and click Open. Using this face hosted family provides the ability for the fixture to be hosted by. you can also specify a . Light Source Axis (L/R). Tilt Plane.planes that define the location of the light source. When working in a linked file environment. these planes are Light Source Axis (L/R). you may use a non-lighting family template. and Light Source Elevation. Using the generic face hosted and non-hosted lighting fixtures has the limitation that the hosting geometry cannot be cut. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 499 .ies file. Create a new lighting family 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.

500 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation. then draw a vertical line segment down to the ceiling (8"). 11 In the Save As dialog. and Chain. Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane. and for Offset.0" and zoom in very close to create the Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 4" above the Light Source reference plane.TIP You may want set the scale to 6" = 1' . click Lines. 13 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and finish with a 1" horizontal line segment to the left. for File name. 9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane.rfa. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. specify 0' 0". Define the fixture geometry 12 On the Design Bar. and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown. . and draw a 4" horizontal line to the left of the center. and drag it up to a point 4" above the Basic Ceiling and Ceiling Plane as shown. click .

Next you will duplicate the original outline. 19 Using the same method. 16 Click Lines. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the short horizontal line at the base. enter 1/16". click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. move the cursor over the line. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 501 . offset by 1/16" to define the thickness of the light fixture housing. 18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1/16" above the existing line as shown. click . and for Offset. press Tab to highlight the short line. then click just above the line.

502 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown. click and . and for Offset. 21 On the Options Bar. clear Chain.20 On the Design Bar. click Lines. enter 0' 0".

The length of the line and its exact location are not important. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 On the toolbar. and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the dark line. and clean up the inside corner as shown. click (Trim). 26 Click Finish Sketch.23 Click Modify. but make sure it is coincident with the vertical plane. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 503 . click Axis.

30 On the Design Bar. click (Point). for Emit from Shape. and on the Options Bar.Lighting ■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization. specify values for the following parameters: Under Electrical . 31 In the Family Types dialog. for Light distribution. not grey) 504 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 29 In the Light Source Definition dialog.27 Save the family. click Light Source Definition. select true (green check. Define family and connector properties 28 In the drawing area. click Family Types. click (Photometric Web). and click OK. select the (yellow) Light Source.

21 VA Under Electrical ■ For Lamp. click the Value column. enter 0. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 505 . 34 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model to view the top of the fixture. click the Value column. enter CF42TRT Under Photometrics ■ ■ For Tilt Angle. and in the Light Loss Factor dialog.ies in the ■ For Light Loss Factor. and is affected by the following fixture properties: ■ ■ ■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance) Initial Intensity (Type) Light Loss Factor (Type) 32 Click OK. enter 3200. and click OK. and double-click View 1.85 for Value. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen output of the lighting fixtures in the room. enter 90 For Photometric Web File. 35 On the Design Bar. enter 44. click Simple for Method. for Color Preset. and click OK. and on the Options Bar.Balanced. and in the Initial Color dialog. click Electrical Connector. and select Ltl9815. 33 In the Project Browser. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average Estimated Illumination. expand View (All) ➤ 3D Views. click the Value column. click the Value column. enter 3000 K and click OK. select Power . for Color Temperature. For Initial Color. For Initial Intensity. or a static value may be entered.Under Electrical Loads ■ For Apparent Load. and verify that (Place on Face) is selected. ■ ■ A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space. click Luminous Flux. select <Custom>. click file browser . and in the Initial Intensity dialog.

For Voltage. 37 Click Modify.36 Highlight the face at the top of the fixture. 40 Save the family Cut a hole in the ceiling 41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. 42 Spin the model to view the bottom of the ceiling.) In the Project Browser. enter Lighting ■ ■ 39 Click OK.95 For System Type. (Light at the intersection of planes is able to pass through the ceiling. click ring as shown. enter 0. click and select Hide Element. 44 On the Design Bar. and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog. it permits light to function as expected in renderings. Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents. and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim (Temporary Hide/Isolate). and click to place the connector on the top of the fixture. click Opening. enter 277 For Load Classification. verify that Power . 45 On the Options Bar. and on the View Control Bar. specify values for the following parameters: For Power Factor. 506 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .Balanced is specified For Apparent Load. click in the column. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. and click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog. . select the connector. and click ■ ■ ■ . and double-click View 1. 43 Select the yellow Light Source. select Apparent Load from the list.

50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The flange will be based on a 150 pound pressure class slip on flange.Ceiling Elec. Flex the light fixture 49 Click File menu ➤ Open. and the wattage increases to 168. Revit MEP provides a Flange Family | 507 . The space tag indicates 22 fc and 135 W. Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external . 52 In the Project Browser. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size.rvt. click Load into Projects. 48 Save the family. click the Training Files icon. click Hide/Isolate. you learned: ■ ■ ■ (Temporary Hide/Isolate). In this exercise. and double-click 1 . you will create a flange connector to model pipe flanges for model coordination.rfa to make the family the active view. select 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project.csv file. and select Reset Temporary The basics of how lighting families work How to create a lighting family from a template Where to place IES files for use by lighting families Flange Family In this exercise. 53 Click Window menu ➤ 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. The lighting level increases to 33 fc. 51 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. 54 On the Design Bar.46 Click Finish Sketch. 55 Select the 4 downlights in the room. and in the Type Selector.On the View Control Bar. click 47 On the View Control Bar. and use a Lookup Table to define several sizes for the flange. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans.

6 Click OK.csv file defines multiple sizes for this flange. Clear the Shared option. 7 Click File ➤ Save. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. and copy the Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. and click OK. click Add. For Part Type. 5 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear the Work Plane-Based option. enter NR For Discipline. select Dimensions Select Type 508 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. Create parameters 9 Click Family Types. select Pipe Size For Group parameter under. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 10 Under Parameters. select Generic Model. The Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Revit MEP looks in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables to retrieve size information. verify that Family parameter is selected for Parameter Type and specify the following parameter data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (. 2 In the New dialog. 8 Using Windows Explorer. NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP.ini file.csv file. select the Transition option. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. When installed in the default path. See Lookup Tables on page 568 and CSV File Structure on page 569.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder.csv) file. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. select Piping For Type. Select the Always Vertical option.rfa. 4 Under Family Category. select Pipe Fittings.rft. (This is the location from which the LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. and in the Save As dialog. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder).

21 On the Options Bar. 0’. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. R2 and specify the following parameters for each one: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select the Family parameter option For Discipline. For Group parameter under. select Piping.0". R1. 22 Click to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the right of the center line. ND. LenA3. ND) 16 Click OK. "LenA2". 0’. "LenA1". Select the Instance option 14 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2" For Lookup Table Name = Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. and select 3” = 1'. enter D1 / 2 For R2. 20 On the Design Bar. and for Offset. Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans.12 Click OK. select Dimensions. enter D2 / 2 For LenA3. 17 Save the family. 13 Using the same method. 15 Specify formulae for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND. enter LenA2 – LenA1 For D1. click . enter 0' 2". and double-click Ref. "D1". ND) For LenA1. 19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar.csv Click Apply. LenA2. Define work planes 18 In the Project Browser. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. create Instance parameters named D1. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. For Type. "D2". enter NR * 2 For R1. 0’. LenA1. D2. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 0’. 23 Click again to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the left of the center line as shown. click Ref Plane. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ For NR. Flange Family | 509 . ND) For LenA2. select Pipe Size. ND) For D2.

28 On the Design Bar. click (Aligned). enter Connector for the Name of the right plane.24 Click Modify 25 Select the left plane and. and on the Options Bar. 30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane. for Name. 29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane. 27 Using the same method. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 510 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter Pipe. under Identity Data. click Dimension. 31 Click Modify.

and click OK. Define geometry 40 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. between the intersections with the right and left vertical planes as shown. but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes. 45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane. for Is Reference. 47 Select the 3 model lines. 42 Click OK twice. 46 Click Modify. click Visibility. and 44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes. click LenA1 from the list. select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right) plane. under Other. click Model Lines. 34 Using the same method. clear Chain. 36 Click . 37 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Fine. click Object Styles. under Other.32 Select the dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and right plane (Connector) and click . click . The length is not important. 38 Click OK. Flange Family | 511 . and on the Options Bar. 41 On the Model Categories tab. 39 Save the family. and on the Options Bar. and set the Projection Line weight of each category to 5. and select Not a Reference. 48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project. . click the Value column for Label. and select 33 In the Element Properties. 43 On the Design Bar. click the Value column. and label it LenA2. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes.

56 Using the same method. create dimensions for the right vertical line. click the Value column. click Dimension. and in Fine view the solid model elements are shown. click . and on the Options Bar. 57 On the Design Bar. 52 On the Design Bar. 55 Click . and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension. press Tab to highlight the endpoint.NOTE Piping objects generally show as linework in Coarse and Medium view. from endpoint to endpoint. 58 Using the same method. and select Not a Reference. then select the other endpoint. click . Thus. and on the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension. move the cursor to the left. 54 Select the horizontal reference plane. we shut off the linework in Fine view. click . 512 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 Click OK. create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line. 49 With all 3 lines still selected. click Dimension. for Reference. under Other.

and click OK. click Set Work Plane. specify Reference Plane : Pipe. click the Value column. and double-click Left. 69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. expand Elevations (Elevation 1). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 67 Click Lines. for Label. click and . under Other. 71 Select the circle.59 Click Modify. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Value column. click 72 Select the dimension line. 64 On the Design Bar. for Label. and in the drawing area. under Other. 70 Click Modify. . click . Flange Family | 513 . and select R2. and select D2. 68 On the Options Bar. and click . 60 Select the dimension for the overall length of the left line. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. Create the first extrusion 63 In the Project Browser. 65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. 66 In the Work Plane dialog. and enter 0' 5". 62 Using the same method. click Radius. and on the Options Bar. select the dimension for the right line and label it D1.

for Visibility/Graphics. 76 In the Element Properties dialog. . click the Value column. 78 Under Graphics. 90 In the Element Properties. under Other. and click OK. 82 On the Sketch Editor tab on the Design Bar. select LenA2. and click OK. for Extrusion End. 514 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . for Label. 77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Create the second extrusion 81 On the Design Bar. click column. . click Set Work Plane. click Edit. 83 In the Work Plane dialog. and enter 0' 10". 80 Click Finish Sketch. and click 91 Click OK. click Radius. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 75 Click Extrusion Properties. 85 On the Options Bar. specify Reference Plane : Center (Left/Right). 79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 88 Select the circle. 84 Click Lines. under Constraints. and click OK twice. and in the drawing area.74 Click OK. click 89 Select the dimension line. and select R1. 87 Click Modify. click and . clear Coarse and Medium. in the 86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.

under Constraints. 96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and for System Type.0". (Model Graphics Style). verify that is selected. and click OK. for Extrusion End. expand 3D Views. and double-click View 1. clear Coarse and Medium. 100 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. 98 Save the family. click extrusions. for Visibility. click Edit. select Fitting. and select 6” = 1'. 95 Under Graphics. click Pipe Connector. select LenA1. and click OK twice. Flange Family | 515 .92 Click Extrusion Properties. 105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange. 97 Click Finish Sketch. where the 2 extrusions meet. and select Wireframe to view both in the 102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown. 104 On the Options Bar. Add connectors 99 In the Project Browser. click column. 103 On the Design Bar. 101 On the View Control Bar. 94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 93 In the Element Properties dialog.

516 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK. if necessary.106 Click to add the connector. 110 In the Element Properties dialog. to change the direction of flow. 109 With the connector selected. 107 Click Modify. under Dimensions. for Radius. click and. enter 5". 108 Select the connector. click . The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face.

add a connector to the larger extrusion. 112 Click Pipe Connector. and using the same method. Flange Family | 517 .111 Spin the flange to view the back of the larger extrusion.

click 119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 115 Select the first connector. for Radius.113 Click Modify. 118 In the Element Properties dialog. if necessary. 518 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK twice. You then create single line geometry for the elbow. click Link Connector on the Options Bar. 114 Select the connector. test the fitting geometry. and on the Options Bar. to change the direction of flow. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. under Dimensions. select NR. First. click and. 116 Click Modify. you can use the same method to create a duct fitting family for air systems. and set the object visibility. click . you create the physical fitting geometry by using reference planes and lines. and click the second connector. and by defining fitting size parameters. in the column. After completing the pipe fitting family. 120 Save the family Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family In this exercise. you create an elbow pipe fitting family. 117 Select both connectors.

If necessary. 9 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. if you have other projects open during a session. 2 In the New dialog. Define reference planes Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family Editor. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 519 . Click Open. under Family Category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in.rft. You can also press CTRL+S. click . Verify that Always vertical is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. click the current scale value. It is recommended that you methodically follow the steps and periodically check your work against the exercise. 13 On the View Control Bar. 10 Maximize the Ref. Verify that Shared is cleared. For Part Type. Even if you have created parametric families before. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Level to make it the active view. Level floor plan window. and verify that both reference planes have been pinned. on the Edit toolbar. verify that Imperial Templates is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Work Plane-Based is cleared. Select Generic Model. and save the family as Threaded Generic Elbow. 14 Select the 2 reference planes. However. navigate to a folder of your choice. Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project. select Elbow. 6 Click OK.NOTE Fittings are among the most complex families to create. 7 Click File ➤ Save. select Pipe Fittings: 5 Under Family Parameters. Configure the elbow pipe fitting family 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model. and double-click Ref. A new family file is created and new views open. one window for each open project remains open. creating system families typically takes more time to complete. and select 6" = 1'-0". 8 In the Save As dialog. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. It may take a longer to complete this exercise as compared to other exercises in this tutorial.

and in the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click . enter Coupling. 21 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. for Name. click . 18 Click Modify. 22 Select the horizontal Center (Front/Back) reference plane. for Name. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Ref Plane. 16 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. A tooltip and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name.Pinning prevents accidentally moving the reference planes. enter 0' 1". TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object. 15 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select the left plane. add another vertical plane 2" to the left of the left (Fitting) plane. 17 Click to the left the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane to place a new reference line to the left of the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane. enter Fitting. 23 Add new reference plane 2" above the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. under Identity Data. 520 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

(Line) is selected. 25 Right-click the new reference plane. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 521 . 27 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. For Offset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. and click Element Properties. verify that 0' 0" is specified.24 Click Modify. Verify that Radius is cleared. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Radius. Create reference lines and dimension them Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family. You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry. click Reference Lines. and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. for Name. 29 On the Options Bar. They are not displayed when the family is used in a project.

33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane. draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane as shown. 38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 31 On the Edit toolbar. 32 Select the middle vertical reference plane (Fitting). you draw an arced reference line. 34 Using the same method. and click the right end of the reference line to align the right end of the reference line to the Fitting reference plane. draw a horizontal line of the approximate length and location as shown. 35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical reference plane (Coupling). 37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.30 In the drawing area. click (Align). 36 Using the same method. Next. 522 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

Verify that Radius is cleared. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 523 . 42 Move the cursor directly down. click the right end of the left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc. 41 In the drawing area. and press Enter to specify a 45 degree radius for the arc. select this sketching option from the list. (Arc from center and endpoints). 45 Select the arc reference line. click Reference Lines. enter 45. 44 Click Modify. verify that 0' 0" is specified. click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to specify the center of the arc. and. and after the endpoint snap displays. 40 On the Options Bar. and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ). do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected.39 On the Design Bar. 43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc. ■ You may need to click ■ ■ For Offset.

For Offset. Verify that Radius is cleared. The dimension control that is located perpendicular to the line being dimensioned represents the overall length of that line. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. 47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line.NOTE Temporary dimensions have two dimension controls that allow you to convert the temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. By default. click Reference Lines. 49 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown. 51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference plane. you draw a diagonal reference line. Next. The dimension control located near the reference plane represents the projected length of that line relative to the reference plane. 524 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and adjust the length of the witness lines as shown. (Line) is selected. 48 On the Design Bar. 50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point. dimensions are temporary—they only display when selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of the arc).

60 With the Dimension tool active. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 525 . 53 Select the diagonal reference line. 58 On the Options Bar. 52 Click Modify. 54 Using the same method. 55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way.While drawing the diagonal reference line. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected. convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal reference line to a permanent dimension. and add an angular dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which is located below the diagonal reference line). on the Options Bar. zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls. verify that ■ ■ ■ (Aligned) is selected. 56 On the Design Bar. 61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown. Between the Fitting and the Center vertical reference planes. Between the Coupling and the Fitting vertical reference planes. click (Angular). 59 Add the following aligned dimensions: Between the Radius and the Center (Front/Back) horizontal reference planes. click Dimension. 57 In the Type Selector. the Tangent Extension tooltip may display to indicate that the diagonal reference line is tangent to the arced reference line. and clean up the witness lines as necessary.

For Type of Parameter. Create family parameters and assign them to dimensions 63 On the Design Bar. Select Instance to create an Instance Parameter. verify that Family parameter is selected. 65 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Dimensions. select Piping. enter LenA1. under Parameters. click Add. For Group parameter under. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 66 Under Parameter Data. is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog.62 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. click Family Types. 67 Click OK. The new family parameter. For Discipline. 68 Using the same method. LenA1. select Pipe Size. 64 In the Family Types dialog. create the following family parameters: Name Discipline Type of Parameter Group parameter under Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Angle Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Instance/Type Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance LenA2 BdyRad CplRad NomDia NomRad Ang Piping Piping Piping Piping Piping Common 526 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . under Parameter Type.

75 Using Windows Explorer. select the LenA1 family parameter. the calculated length defines the geometry. select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. enter LenA1 * tan(Ang / 2). for Label. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter as this will cause errors. Fittings must have their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right) and Center (Front/Back) reference planes. you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added. For NomRad. enter NomRad * 2. in the Value column. in the Formula column. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. Use a lookup table file to define multiple sizes A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information.25". 70 Click OK. The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter. enter 2". in the Formula column. and copy the Threaded Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 527 . NOTE When specifying formulae. Revit MEP uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter. in the Value column. 69 In the Family Types dialog. For LenA2. NOTE Associate each dimension separately. 74 Press CTRL+S. specify that following values and formulae: ■ ■ ■ ■ For CplRad.Next. 73 Using the same method. Lookup tables are not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by various project-specific factors. 72 On the Options Bar. enter 1. select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back) and Radius reference planes. 71 In the drawing area. NomDia.

Next. Level floor plan is the active view. 83 In the Project Browser. This sweep uses the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry.csv lookup table file. click Family Types.rft. "LenA1".csv file extension and copy it to the LookupTables folder.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size. For CplRad. RELATED During fitting creation. you can add them according to manufacturers’ specifications. "CplRad". For BdyRad.Generic Elbow. 0. Revit MEP may not be able to read it and any family type parameter formulae that refer to that lookup table will most likely return a value of 0 and errors will occur. 82 In the New dialog. enter Threaded Generic Elbow. you must save the lookup table file in a plain text format. you begin creating the fitting geometry. and click Open. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. 76 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for Lookup Table Name. NomDia). If the file is saved in a proprietary format. verify that the Ref. 528 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .csv and click Apply. 80 Press CTRL+S to save the family. This is the default path. However. select Profile. "BdyRad". and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. 79 Click OK. Next. copy the lookup table data from the problematic lookup table file and paste it into a new text file. If you encounter this type of issue. 0. 0. enter the following formulae: ■ ■ ■ For LenA1. 81 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Save the text file with the file name including the . if specific pipe sizes that you need are not present in the lookup table file by default. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. in the Value column. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. NomDia). The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted. 78 In the Formula column. Create a fitting profile You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 77 In the Family Types dialog. NomDia).

and select 6" = 1'. 86 On the Options Bar. 98 Zoom in to view the sketch. 97 On the View Control Bar. click the current scale. enter 1". 94 Using the same method. 89 Select the circle.0". do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. ). 88 Click Modify. click Lines. and then click the circle center mark to align the circle horizontally. verify that Profiles is selected. For Offset. ■ (Circle). verify that 0' 0" is specified. under Graphics. 90 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Align). 85 In the Type Selector. 96 Click the dimension value. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 529 . 92 Click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. and click OK. 93 Click to lock the circle to the horizontally. 87 In the drawing area. zoom out.84 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Center Mark Visible. click . align and lock the circle vertically. 95 Select the circle. and on the Options Bar. Verify that Radius is cleared. draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown. 91 On the Edit toolbar. and click the dimension control ( The temporary dimension converts to a permanent dimension. and press ENTER. The center mark displays allowing you to align the circle to the reference planes. You may need to click ■ ■ and select this sketching option from the list.

create a family type named Coupling. 530 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter Rad. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 100 In the Family Types dialog. The new family type is listed in the Name list. The dimension is now associated to and controlled by the Rad family parameter. select Rad. select Pipe Size.99 On the Design Bar. under Family Types. under Parameter Data. 105 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. Click OK. select Dimensions. Verify that the Type option is selected to create a Type parameter. 103 Name the new family type. Fitting. 106 In the drawing area. For Discipline. you create a new family type. click New. 107 On the Options Bar. select the dimension. for Label. 104 Using the same method. click Add. For Group parameter under. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. The new family parameter is listed under Dimensions. and click OK. 102 In the Family Types dialog. select Piping. Next. For Type of Parameter. click OK. 101 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

and click OK twice. for Rad. In contrast. Next. 118 In the drawing area. Each sweep is based on the profile that you created and loaded into the project. 112 In the Associate Family Parameter. click Apply. and save the family as Threaded Pipe Profile. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Threaded Pipe Profile. for Rad. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. click . 110 In the Project Browser. 116 In the Associate Family Parameter. and click Properties. 117 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. TIP Remember that when you use cross-picking (drag right to left) to select an object.108 Click File ➤ Save. select Fitting. click . Next. you load the fitting profile into the project. the cross-picking border only needs to intersect an object in order to select it. and click OK. 114 For Type. Notice that the Threaded . Create sweeps using reference lines The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 531 . select BdyRad. an object must be fully contained when using a pick box (drag left to right). select CplRad. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. click Load into Projects to load the Threaded Pipe Profile into the Threaded – Generic Elbow family. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur. you create the fitting geometry. right click Coupling.rfa. 113 In the Type Properties dialog. 115 Under Dimensions.Generic Elbow project becomes active. The object does not need to be fully contained within the border. You create sweeps using the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry. 109 On the Design Bar. Associate family parameters to a profile parameter You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the radius of the elbow fitting geometry. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. under Dimensions.

128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. Verify that the X. 532 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Y. Only the reference lines and reference planes display. 122 On the Design Bar. 125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. 126 In the drawing area. select the left horizontal reference line. 124 In the drawing area. 127 On the Options Bar.119 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list. click the red dot on the horizontal reference line. and Angle options are specified at 0. clear Reference Lines and Reference Planes. 120 In the Filter dialog. click Finish Path. click (Filter Selection). 121 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sweep. click Pick Path. 123 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.

133 In the drawing area. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 533 . 130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. Next. 134 On the Options Bar. select the arced reference line. 131 In the drawing area. Y.The geometry for the left coupling is created. 132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. 129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and Angle options are specified at 0. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. click the red dot on the arced reference line. Verify that the X. click Finish Path. you create the geometry for the fitting body. 135 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list. click Pick Path.

The elbow fitting geometry is created.The geometry for the fitting body is created. 137 In the Project Browser. enter VG. Next. you verify the fitting geometry. 136 Using the same method. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting. 138 With the 3D view active. Next. 534 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. clear all annotation categories. The fitting geometry displays. and select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling. add a solid sweep. and click OK.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 535 . cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. drag the cursor to spin the model. 146 On the View Control Bar. click Check None. 145 In the Filter dialog. 141 In the Project Browser. click The 3 sweeps are selected. you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. you need to hide some of the geometry in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display. Coarse and Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. and verify the fitting geometry. First. double-click Floor Plans ➤ Ref.140 While pressing SHIFT and the middle mouse button. 143 In the drawing area. In Revit MEP. (Filter Selection). Level to make it the active view. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 144 On the Options Bar. Create detail level geometry Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level. The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe fittings as double line. and click OK. In this section. This fitting geometry displays when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used. 142 Press CTRL+S to save the family. select Other.

click Model Lines. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. 150 In the drawing area. 536 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 147 On the Design Bar. select the left horizontal reference line. 148 In the Type Selector. verify that 0' 0" is specified. do the following: ■ For Plane. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. Verify that Lock is cleared. Select (Pick Lines).Only the reference planes and reference lines display. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 149 On the Options Bar.

click to lock the model line to the reference line. 151 With the model line selected. you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from top to bottom). 156 Click Modify. 154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension. This converts the overall angle temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 153 Click Modify. 155 Zoom out. This associates the angle dimension of the arced model line to the Ang family parameter. A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object.A model line is created over the reference line. and lock the model line to the arced reference line. and on the Options Bar. select the arced reference line to create an arced model line. 152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method. and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right. select Ang. TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object and press Tab. for Label. Each time you press Tab. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 537 . 157 Select the permanent dimension.

169 Relocate the dimension annotations. verify that Angular Dimension Style : Linear angular style is selected. If necessary. press Tab to locate the model line. click the diagonal model line. 163 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you dimension the diagonal model line. NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line. 165 In the Type Selector. Revit MEP warns you that locking the alignment would over constrain the sketch. 159 Using the same method. and finally move the cursor and click to place the dimension. 161 Select the diagonal model line. then click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. 164 On the Options Bar. NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line. 168 Using the same method. create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line (located at the right end of the arced model line). Next. 166 In the drawing area. 160 Click Modify. 167 Click Modify. and modify the witness lines as shown. convert the diagonal model line overall length temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 162 Using the same method.158 Relocate the dimension annotation. If you lock it. click Dimension. associate the new angular dimension to the Ang family parameter. click (Angular). and associate it to the LenA1 family parameter. 538 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and modify the witness lines as shown.

The part flexes to become a 90 degree elbow fitting. click Family Types. enter 90. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Flex the part 172 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. 171 Press CTRL+S. for Ang. 173 In the Family Types dialog. Next. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 539 . and click Apply. you flex the part to validate the design.170 On the View Control Bar.

and click OK. 174 Restore the Ang parameter to 45. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. click (Filter Selection). Lines (Pipe Fittings) are the model lines. this is usually caused by a constraint issue.NOTE If the part does not flex and errors occur. 177 In the Filter dialog. Add tick marks and dimension them You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or Medium (single line) detail level. and click OK. Everything except for model lines and reference planes are selected. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view. 176 On the Options Bar. Next. Check all constraints and verify that model lines were created and properly constrained. 178 On the View Control Bar. 175 In the drawing area. 540 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . you create tick marks. clear Lines (Pipe Fitting) and Reference Planes.

do the following: ■ For Plane.Only model lines and reference planes display. TIP You draw this model line on top of the Coupling reference plane. 183 At the right end of the fitting. draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the diagonal model line as shown. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the horizontal model line as shown. Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. Line length is approximate. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. 181 On the Options Bar. 182 At the left end of the fitting. click Model Lines. verify that 0' 0" is specified. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 541 . 180 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. Verify that Radius is cleared.

then move the cursor to the left and click to place the dimension. dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking the diagonal model line first.Again. 187 On the left end of the fitting. 186 On the Options Bar. 542 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . verify that (Aligned) is selected. The top half of the model line (tick mark) is dimensioned. The 2 tick marks are drawn. 185 In the Type Selector. dimension the bottom half of the left model line. click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane and click the top end point of the model line (tick mark). verify that Linear Dimension Style : Linear is selected. 189 Using the same method. you dimension each side of the 2 tick marks. NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line. 184 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Next. length is approximate. and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark). 188 Using the same method.

NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. 190 Click Modify. You cannot select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter. 192 Using the same method. for Label. 198 Relocate the dimension annotations.You place 2 dimensions for the right model line. you create an angular dimension between the diagonal model line and the right model line tick mark. The dimension are as shown. and modify the witness lines as shown. 197 Select the angular dimension. 193 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 194 On the Options Bar. 195 Click the diagonal model line and then click the right model line tick mark. 191 Select the lower dimension for the left model line. and on the Options Bar. click Dimension. 196 Click Modify. select CplRad This associates that dimension to the CplRad family parameter. and lock it to 90 degrees. move the cursor down and click to place the dimension. click (Angular). You may need to zoom out to locate the lock. associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter. Next. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 543 .

Flex the part 201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 544 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 90. click Family Types. 202 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply.Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. for Ang. 200 Press CTRL+S to save the family. and for NomRad enter 1 1/2". click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ . The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 3 inch diameter.199 On the View Control Bar.

click (Filter Selection). NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting.203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values. Next. select Lines (Pipe Fittings). You may want to refer to the Threaded Generic Elbow. and click OK. click Visibility. 204 In the drawing area. You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate it. 207 With the model lines selected. and click OK. you set object visibility. click Check None. verify that Coarse and Medium are selected. Specify object visibility You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail level setting. Only model lines are selected. clear Fine. 206 In the Filter dialog. you specify the 2-line geometry for the Fine detail level setting. you specify this single line geometry to a detail level setting. Next. 208 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Next.csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on the manufacturers’ specifications. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 545 . the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe diameter that is not included in the lookup table file. 205 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. This specifies that the single-line fitting geometry will display when only the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are selected. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing.

and after the edge highlights. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. click (Filter Selection). 222 On the Options Bar. click Visibility. and click OK. click Pipe Connector. select Fitting from the system type list. and verify that Face) is selected. (Place on 223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting. 214 Press CTRL+S. 219 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. You begin by placing the primary connector. select Other.209 In the drawing area. 213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Only the 3 sweeps are selected. click None. 221 On the Design Bar. 211 In the Filter dialog. 210 On the Options Bar. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view. 220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting. Add connectors 215 In the Project Browser. 217 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 212 With the sweeps selected. on the Options Bar. 546 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Next. The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected. click (Filter Selection). 216 In the drawing area. clear Coarse and Medium. you add connectors to the elbow fitting family. click to place the primary connector. select Dimensions. verify that Fine is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. click None. and click OK. 218 In the Filter dialog. The fitting displays.

the primary connector must be placed on the face that is on the X-axis. You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 547 . Unexpected behavior can result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors. Notice that crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector. NOTE When you place fitting connectors. and that if all connectors are not properly rotated and linked. 224 Using the same method. place a connector on the left face of the fitting. You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis.The primary connector is placed.

select NomRad. click Link Connector. The 2 connectors are linked. Next. Notice that values are assigned to both associated parameters. Although the connectors are round. ■ The connector radii change. and click OK. It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. you specify connector properties. For Angle. 227 On the Options Bar. you link both connectors. Next. In the Element Properties dialog. it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they are oriented vertically.225 Click Modify. 228 In the drawing area. 229 On the Options Bar. and click OK. The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. click . 230 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. select ■ . ■ ■ For Radius. select Ang. click OK. 548 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click . in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. you rotate the connectors. and click the other connector. The 2 selected connectors display in red. and that these parameters cannot be edited in the Element Properties dialog. This allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing. 226 Select the primary connector (indicated by crosshairs). verify that Fitting is selected. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. do the following: For System Type. under Instance Parameters. Rotate connectors 231 In the 3D view. Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select the 2 connectors.

the rectangular duct fitting will be inserted improperly. If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly. The connector orientation determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. 232 Spin the fitting to view the entire primary connector. 234 Move the cursor over the model line and to the left of the connector arrow.IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement. The height is not on these axes. it is extremely important for rectangular connectors such as those on rectangular duct fittings. click to specify the rotation start point. Although this is not as important for round connectors. and on the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 549 . click (Rotate). and click to specify the rotation end point. and after the intersection snap displays. creating an unexpected result. 233 Select the connector. 235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees. You may find it easier to rotate connectors in a 3D view. Remember that for rectangular connectors. where the part geometry is clearly visible. the rectangular connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes.

236 Using the same method. you verify the connector arrow direction. rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation.NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane. 237 Press CTRL+S to save the family. The primary connector is rotated and now has a vertical orientation. This also flips the connector arrow. You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section. 550 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Next.

then click Browse. verify that Project is selected. Click OK.Verify connector arrow direction 238 In the 3D view. Otherwise. You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows. verify that the path points to the Systems-Default. IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being created to complete a connection. 239 Press CTRL+S. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Template file. The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active. This is the default view when a project. Test the elbow fitting in a project 240 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you load the threaded elbow family into the new project.rfa . Because Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 551 . 244 In the Project Browser. If more than one project is open. and locate this template file. It does not indicate flow direction. NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar. TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options). based on the systems default template.rte template. and click OK.rte template file. Next. The 1 . Under Create New. a connector arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated.3D View to switch back to the threaded coupling family. click Load into Projects. The Systems-Default template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project. a new project is created based on the current project template. opens. 241 In the New Project dialog. If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default. verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its connector as shown. verify that the 1 . This template may not be the Systems-Default template. In most instances. 243 On the Design Bar.Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. the duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it.Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view. select the project that you just created from the Load into Projects dialog. 242 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded Generic Elbow.

it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech view. 245 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type. 246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. 247 On the Options Bar, click .

248 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 249 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Elbow, select Threaded – Generic Elbow: Threaded – Generic Elbow, and click OK twice. 250 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter) select 3”. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that the Offset elevation is specified at 9' 0"

251 In the drawing area, draw some piping, using various angles and offset elevations. NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file. 252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.

You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed properly. Next, you check connectivity. Check connectivity 253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity. The piping highlights indicating that it is connected. 254 Click Modify. Hide shape handles 255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view. 256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.

552 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow. Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.

258 Drag the upper triangular shape handle upward as shown.

Notice that this shape handle modified the fitting geometry.

Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 553

IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected. This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings, duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference lines and all reference planes that are used for that family. 259 Press CTRL+Z to undo the modification. 260 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded - Generic Elbow.rfa - Floor Plan: Ref. Level to switch to the elbow family floor plan view. 261 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing, including reference planes.

262 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

263 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Reference Planes, and click OK. Only the reference planes are selected. 264 On the Options Bar, click .

265 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK. 266 Using the same method, specify Not a Reference for all reference lines. 267 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 268 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select the test project in which you tested the elbow fitting, and click OK. 269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. The test project becomes active. 270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout. Notice that all shape handles are hidden.

554 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The threaded elbow is ready to be used in a project. RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting, proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and drawn.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family
It is likely that you will need to create annotation symbols that are not part of a building model. For example, a common symbol in MEP drawings is a New to Existing Connection callout. In this exercise, you create such an annotation. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the New dialog, select Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open. 3 Maximize the window, and in the drawing area, zoom in to view the note (located near the intersection of the reference planes). This note contains key points to remember when creating an annotation family. 4 Select the note and delete it. 5 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the intersection of the 2 reference planes. Draw lines 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Clear Chain.

(Draw), and

(Line) are selected.

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 0 1/8, and press Enter. This creates a 1/8" line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line. 10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 1/8" lines located above, below, and to the left of the intersection as shown.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 555

TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes. 12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. This hides the reference planes allowing you to better view the lines.

Next, you create the filled regions. Create filled regions

13 On the toolbar, click

(Fine Lines).

14 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design, verify that Lines is selected. 16 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 17 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Select

(Draw) is selected.

(Arc from center and endpoints). and, select this sketching option from the list.

You may need to click

Click Radius, and enter 3/32".

18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.

556 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.

20 Move the cursor over the right horizontal line, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the end point of the arc.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 557

An arced line is drawn.

21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Click

(Draw) and Chain are selected.

(Line).

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

22 In the drawing area, click the upper end point of the arced line, then click the intersection of the 4 lines, and finally click the lower end point of the arced line.

558 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

A chain of 2 lines is drawn. 23 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. This filled region is created.

24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.

Next, you draw a circle around the 2 filled regions. 25 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Click

(Draw) is selected.

(Circle).

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 559

■ ■

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Click Radius, and verify that 0' 3/32" is specified.

27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle. 28 Click Modify.

29 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as New to Existing.rfa Test the annotation symbol in a project 30 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 32 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rvt. 33 Click Window menu ➤ New to Existing.rfa - Drawing Sheet to switch to the new annotation symbol family. 34 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 35 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 36 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Symbol. 37 In the Type Selector, verify that New to Existing is selected. 38 On the Options Bar, click .

39 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 40 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 42 In the drawing area, zoom in, and click to place the annotation symbol in the project. 43 Press ESC twice. Next, you modify the symbol leader. 44 Select the leader to display shape handles.

560 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.

46 Drag the end shape handle to modify the annotation symbol as shown.

47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol. 48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts
A defining feature of Revit MEP content is the concept of connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP content to participate in specific systems and facilitate calculations for a variety of parameters.

Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.

Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and others.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts | 561

Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.

Connector Properties
The discipline assigned to a connector determines the connector’s properties. The following tables show the different connector parameters, by property group, for each discipline and a brief description of their functionality.
Electrical Constraints Edge loop centered Graphics Size on screen Electrical - Loads True Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 3) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 2) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 1) x (Power Factor). Percentage of power attributed to this connector. Active only when Power is specified as System Type. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >2. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >1. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor. Connector placement method (read only).

True Load Phase 2

True Load Phase 1

Power Factor

Apparent Load Phase 3

Apparent Load Phase 2

562 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Apparent Load Phase 1

Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current). Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power. The voltage specified on the connector. Active only when the System Type is Power. Possible values are: Data, Power - Balanced, Power - Unbalanced, Telephone, Security, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, Communication. Possible values are: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. Possible values are: Lagging, Leading. Possible values are: 1, 2, or 3.

Apparent Load

Voltage

System Type

Load Classification Power Factor State Number of Poles Identity Data Index Primary Connector

A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. A description of the connector

Connector Description

Mechanical (HVAC) Constraints Edge loop centered Angle Connector placement method (read only) Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Flow Factor Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

Connectors | 563

Loss Coefficient Flow Configuration Flow Direction System Type

Active only when the Loss Method is Coefficient. Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Undefined. Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.

Loss Method Mechanical - Airflow Pressure Drop Flow Dimensions Shape Height

Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss. The amount of air flowing at this connector.

Possible values are: Rectangular or Round. The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The radius of the connector when the Shape is defined to be round.

Width

Radius

Identity Data Index Primary Connector A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only) A description of the connector

Link Connector Index Connector Description

Mechanical (Piping) Constraints Edge loop centered Connector placement method (read only).

564 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Angle

Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration is Fixture Units. K Coefficient (K Factor) is only editable if Loss Method is specified as “K Coefficient”. Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector. Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated. Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K Coefficient, Specific Loss. Possible values are: Checked or unchecked. Possible values are: Undefined, Hydronic Supply, Hydronic Return, Sanitary, Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot Water, Fire Protection, Other. Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Projecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

K Coefficient

Flow Factor

Flow Pressure Drop Flow Configuration Flow Direction

Loss Method

Allow Slope Adjustments System Type

K Coefficient Table

Dimensions Radius Identity Data Index A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). The nominal size of the connector.

Connectors | 565

Primary Connector

Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only). A description of the connector.

Link Connector Index Connector Description

System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.

Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.

Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).

Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems. When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply, Return, Other.

When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).

When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).

566 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Load Classifications
Revit MEP maintains information about loads associated with the rooms in a project. As devices and equipment are placed in rooms, Revit MEP keeps track of the loads based on load type: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. The loads associated with the room can be view in the Element Properties for each room, and displayed in schedules.

Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:

Place on Face This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier to use, and is suitable for most cases. Place on Work Plane This option allows placement of the connector on a selected plane. For many cases it would be possible to imitate the place on face option by specifying a plane and using dimensions to constrain the connector to the desired location. However, this method generally requires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively.

Connectors | 567

NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front / Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.

Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside. When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or otherwise. When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.

Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family, titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You must start the family with the appropriate template.

Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv) file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file. The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue) Where: Is:

568 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

result LookupTableName LookupColumn

the returned value. the name of the CSV file to lookup. the name of the column from which the result value is to be returned. the value that will be returned if LookupValue is not found. the value to find in the first column of the table.

DefaultIfNotFound LookupValue

CSV File Structure
The first row of values in the CSV file is for header information, to describe the contents of subsequent columns. The headers are of the format ParameterName##ParameterType##ParameterUnits Acceptable parameter types are: NUMBER, LENGTH, AREA, VOLUME, ANGLE, and OTHER For example, a column may have the following header: TotalArea##AREA##INCHES to represent the total area in square inches. The first column in the file contains a description. The Lookup Function processes the information in the file starting with column 2.

Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped (associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking (small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited. The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the parameters to which they have been mapped.

Parameter Mapping | 569

Category
Revit MEP components fall into general categories (pipe fittings, lighting fixtures, and so on). The Family Category specified when a family is created determines which Family Parameters are activated. The settings for these family parameters affect the behavior for the part and identifies the type of component. In Family Editor, the Family Category and Parameters settings are found in the Settings menu. Depending on the Family Category and the type of template that the family was derived from (host-based, generic model, detail component, generic tag, and so on), different Family Parameters apply. The following table lists each Family Category, and indicates the applicable Family Parameters. Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver- Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation Shared

Air Terminals Communications Devices Data Devices Duct Accessories Duct Fittings Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Fire Alarm Devices Generic Models Lighting Devices Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Nurse Call Devices Pipe Accessories Pipe Fittings Plumbing Fixtures Security Devices

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

570 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Duct Fittings.Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation X X X Shared Sprinklers Telephone Devices X X X X X X Family Parameters ■ ■ ■ Light Source: See Light Source on page 571. hemispherical. Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family. Plumbing Fixture Part Types Damper. Generally the Type Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category. each lighting fixture family has one light source. The part type serves 2 functions: ■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. The following table shows which part types apply to which family categories: Family Categories Air Terminals. rectangle. Equipment. and Initial Color Control. So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP. and the light distribution (spherical. line. To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a chandelier or a set of track lights). Part Type: See Part Types on page 571. Hood. Duct Accessories. Valve Light Source | 571 . circle). and determines the behavior for the parts in the family. Elbow. Pipe Accessories. Transition. Undefined. you can specify the shape of the light element (point. the Part Type values available depends on the family category. However. Obstruction. This allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Pipe Fittings. The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP. Mechanical Equipment. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the database. You can also define photometric characteristics. In general. Fan and System Interaction. there are times when this is not appropriate. spot. Light Source A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). ■ If a family category provides a Part Type parameter. for fittings it would not be valid to replace a cross with a transition. To determine the part type family. For example. or photometric web). Initial Intensity. you can adjust the position and brightness of each light source to achieve the desired lighting effects. as is the case with receptacles and switches. Part Types The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family category. Junction. In a project.Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver. create a nested family. Entry. such as Light Loss Factor. Exit. the part type must be defined. Duct Mounted Equipment.

Lighting Devices. steam generators Elbow: A bend or elbow type fitting Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers. Nurse Call. Data Panel. the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box. grills. Nurse Call Devices. Fire Alarm. and light fixtures. Data Devices. Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. and Communication. Electrical Equipment. grates Exit: Point at which fluid leaves the system Equipment: Generic equipment Fan and System Interaction AHUs. Switch Junction Box ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Damper: Used to control flow volume. Transformer. Security. Telephone Devices Part Types Normal. Normal: Devices such as receptacles. Security Devices. such as an inline filter Transition: Shape or size change Undefined: No specific functionality Valve: Valves and similar accessories Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data. Panelboard. Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. fire alarm components. lab or other exhaust hoods Junction: Intersection of 3 or more segments (tee. As indicated in the image. Lighting Fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 572 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Controls. wye) Obstruction: Anything that causes a pressure drop. Electrical Fixtures. inline fans Hood: Kitchen. Telephone.Family Categories Communication Devices. Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device. Fire Alarm Devices. cross. As indicated in the image. Switchboard. Duct Mounted Equipment: Smoke detectors. the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch.

■ Switchboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. Transformer: Used to interconnect Panelboards and/or Switchboards of differing voltages. ■ Part Types | 573 .

574 .

the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. NOTE For training purposes. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2009. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. balconies. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. lofty ceilings. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. slight modifications to the building design have been made. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. and a roof garden. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. 575 . exterior fire stairs.

576 .

Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 10 In this tutorial. you learn how to create views from a building model. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. how to create section and elevation views. 577 . section. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. including plan. You learn how to create new views from existing views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. elevation. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 578 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt. click Training Files.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Level 2.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 579 . 2 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans.

enter Vicinity Plan. double-click Vicinity Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 11 Under Floor Plans. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 580 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog.

15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.14 On the View Control Bar. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. and click 1''= 80'-0''. Duplicating Plan Views | 581 . click the current scale. Next.

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 582 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select Elevation: Building Elevation.rvt.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. select 1/8''=1'-0''. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. for Scale. double-click Level 1. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 583 . click Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 8 On the Design Bar. 584 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.

14 In the Type Selector.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. enter South East. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 585 . and click OK. expand Floor Plans. double-click South East. select 1/8''=1'-0''. for Scale. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Elevations. select Section: Building Section. click Section. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click Level 1. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. 586 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 587 . drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. click Split Segment.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place it. Click the midpoint of the section line.

View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and double-click Section 1. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Modify. using the blue circular drag grip. expand Sections (Building Section).21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the View Control Bar. 588 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 24 Select gridline F. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.

you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. To create each view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 589 .

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. for Scale. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. 590 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select 1/4"=1'-0''. select Floor Plan. double-click Level 1. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. click Callout. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Resulting callout view .

and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. Creating Callout Views | 591 . and select the callout boundary. click Modify.

and click OK. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.■ Select the middle grip. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 592 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 On the Design Bar. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. click Modify.

select Detail View: Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. click Callout. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Building Sections). and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. Creating Callout Views | 593 . and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. 13 In the Type Selector.

under Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 18 In the Rename View dialog. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click OK. 594 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Roof Overhang Detail. expand Detail Views (Details). 17 In the Project Browser.

you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. the elevation markers. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 595 .

10 On the floor plan. double-click Level 1. and can be applied to the section line. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Section Head – Custom. select Section Head . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open.Filled. select Custom-Section Head.Custom. and click OK. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. select the section line. 12 For Section Tag. 8 In the Name dialog. for Section Head. clear any others. under Floor Plans. click Edit/New. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. Section Tail – Filled. click Duplicate. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. Section Tail . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 596 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rfa.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK twice.rvt. click Training Files. and click OK. click Load into Project. and click Open. select the current project.

26 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Custom-Callout Head. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. For Dimensions ➤ Width. click Training Files. and select 2. enter 3/4''. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. For Line Weight. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. scroll to Section Marks. 22 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit/New. 15 Under Category. enter 3/4'' Circle. On the floor plan. 27 Click OK twice. notice the circular elevation markers that display. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select 3/4'' Circle. . 23 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. scroll to Section Line. and select 3. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. 17 Under Category. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 597 . Click OK. click Duplicate. select Circle. and click Open. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the floor plan. click the Annotation Objects tab. select 3. for Elevation Tag. and on the Options Bar. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog.

for Callout Tag. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. enter 1/4''. 34 In the Name dialog. select the current project. click the Annotation Objects tab. For Corner Radius. and on the Options Bar. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Load into Project. . 40 Press ESC.30 On the Design Bar. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. select the callout. 598 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 38 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. Click OK. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. and click OK. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 39 Click OK twice. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down to Callout Boundary. clear all others. 43 Under Category. 36 In the drawing. click Duplicate. and click OK. and select 7.

47 Select Callout Leader Line. and visual overrides.rvt. 49 Click OK. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. select Dash. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. filters. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 599 . You learn to create view templates. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Callout Boundary. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. In the left pane of the Open dialog.45 For Line Pattern. Creating a View Template In this exercise. click Training Files. and select 4. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. view regions. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 46 Under Category. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. To accomplish this. masking regions. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan.

and double-click East. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. The crop region displays as red. click (Hide Crop Region). click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Zoom to Fit. 4 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the View Toolbar. 600 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations. under Visibility. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Entourage. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.

enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 13 In the Project Browser.10 Under Visibility. Callouts. elevation markers. grids. double-click North. right-click East. under Elevations. 12 On the View Control bar. levels. 15 In the View Templates dialog. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and click OK. click OK. 14 In the New View Template dialog. 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a View Template | 601 . and click Create View Template From View. and section lines are now hidden in the view. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. under Elevations.

Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. edit the crop region as before. and click OK. 602 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Apply View Template. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. click Apply. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. right-click North. select Black and White Presentation Elevation.rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views.17 In the Project Browser. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. double-click Penthouse. 19 Using the same method.

Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Click OK twice. for View Range. select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. select Level Below (Level 4). 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. for Bottom. right-click. for Level. click Edit.2 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse. View Range and Plan Regions | 603 . under Floor Plans. double-click Roof Plan. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Level 4. under Extents. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. and click Properties. click Plan Region. for View Range. select Roof Plan. 604 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 In the Project Browser. for Level. click Edit. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. right-click. select Level 4. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. for Bottom.

select Unlimited. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 17 On the Design Bar. for Level. select Unlimited. click Edit. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 605 . and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Region Properties. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Move you cursor diagonally. In the left corner of the building. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. Under View Depth.11 On the Options Bar. for View Range. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. click Finish Sketch. for Bottom. click Modify. in this case. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.

13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. under Projection/Surface. select the red color. and click OK. under Categories. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Override under Patterns. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. under Basic colors. for Pattern. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Edit/New. expand Floor Plans.rvt. under Filters. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. 606 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Click OK. select Fire Rating. 17 Using the same method. 12 On the Filter tab. Enter Hr. and click OK.rating of the walls. click the Filters tab. for Color. 5 In the Filters dialog. and double-click Level 1. After you apply the filter. select Walls. click Add. Select contains. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and apply a color. 9 Click OK. enter Rated Walls. click <No Override>. 11 Select Rated Walls. click (New). 7 In the Filters dialog. for Rated Walls. under Views (all). select Solid Fill. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 14 In the Color dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.

click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. you obscure geometry in portions of a view.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. Masking Portions of a View | 607 . you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click Remove. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. To accomplish this.

5 On the View menu. and click Rename.rvt. right-click. under Floor Plans. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 1 In the Project Browser. click Show Crop Region. 4 On the View Control Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and click OK. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. as shown. 608 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

8 Select the crop region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle). 9 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 12 On the Options Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. select Invisible lines. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 11 In the Type Selector. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.7 On the View menu. Masking Portions of a View | 609 . click Masking Region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown.

rvt. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.14 On the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.Level 1. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 610 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 1 In the Project Browser. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. click Finish Sketch.

8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Pattern.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click OK. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. right-click. click black. 11 Click OK twice. 7 Under Cut. and click Rename. under Pattern Overrides. and click Override. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. click <No Override> to apply a color. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click in the Patterns field. right-click. 4 On the View Control Bar. select Walls. and click 1/4''=1'0''. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click the current scale. for Color. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. under Visibility. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Working with Visual Overrides | 611 . 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Solid fill.

14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Grids. clear Floors. 18 Right-click. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 16 Under Visibility. under Visibility. and click OK. 612 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify.

for Pattern. 23 In the Color dialog. click a purple color. 25 Click OK twice. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 21 Under Projection/Surface.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. under Lines. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Dash 1/16''. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. 20 Right-click. and click OK. Working with Visual Overrides | 613 . By using the previous method to make the selection. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Color.

click Projection Lines. right-click. 30 On the Design Bar. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 614 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the sofa. click Modify.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. click . select a bright green color. and click OK twice. 28 For Color. click By Category Override. 29 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.

you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 33 On the View Control Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 615 . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click . how to add views to the sheets. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise.32 Select one of the lamps. right-click.

rvt. and click View. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. 616 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and click OK. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets. click Training Files. click Sheet. right-click. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.

under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 5 When the title block highlights. 3 In the Project Browser. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 7 On the Design Bar. enter A101. enter Site Plan. click Modify. For Sheet Number. Creating Drawing Sheets | 617 . Click OK. and select the title block. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog.Unnamed. For Sheet Name. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. on the Options Bar.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. expand Sheets (all). Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click Modify.

enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Number. click Edit. enter Freighthouse Flats.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter J. For Client Name. MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Project Name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2009-1. for Project Address. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 618 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 14 Click OK. For Project Status. Smith. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 2009. enter 15 May. under Other. enter For Approval. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 11 In the Edit Text dialog.

16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter Floor Plan. select the new sheet name. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 17 In the Project Browser. right-click. Adding Views to Sheets | 619 . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click Save.Sections A108 .rvt. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.rvt.Elevations A105 .Stairs In the following exercise. and click OK. you add views to these sheets.Elevations A107 . and click OK.Layout Plan A104 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Elevations A106 . for Name. and click Rename.

under Sheets (all). The red border around the view no longer displays. under Floor Plans.Floor Plan. and click to place it.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A102 . 620 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click A104 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Elevations. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and drag it to the sheet. and click to place the view. under Sheets (all).

12 On the Design Bar. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). align it with the East elevation. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). Adding Views to Sheets | 621 . and click to place it. click Modify. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.Sections. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A107 . Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.

double-click A108 . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. under Sheets (all).Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. click Modify. for View Scale. zoom in to the grip. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and press TAB until it highlights. 18 Under Floor Plans. 622 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Select title bar. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. move the cursor over it. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''.Stairs. and click OK. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. . Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser.

View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. and then make changes and deactivate the view. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. under Floor Plans. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 623 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. you must first activate the view on the sheet. In order to do this. double-click Level 1. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise.

click Modify.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. and click Activate View. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 2 Select the building section view. 624 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click A107 . and press ENTER. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.rvt. enter 54'. 5 On the Design Bar.Sections.

and click Deactivate View. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.6 Right-click. 7 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 625 . double-click North. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

click Camera. enter T. 3 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Floor Plans. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. 626 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. enter Title Sheet. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. After you create the sheet. and click Properties. 7 Place the camera as shown. select the new sheet name. right-click. and click OK. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. You modify the view to hide the view title. The camera view displays. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.8 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Extents.8 On the Options Bar. enter 420'. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. For Far Clip Offset. enter 5'. Click OK. enter 60'. Under Camera. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. select Far Clip Active. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 627 . for Eye Elevation. For Target Elevation. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar.

double-click T . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. Click Apply. Under Model Crop Size. under Sheets (all). 15 With the view selected. and then click OK. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. enter 25''. click Size. select Scale (locked proportions). for Height. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. on the Options Bar.13 In the Project Browser. 628 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 Under 3D Views.Title Sheet.

24 Click OK twice. under Graphics. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 629 . The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Duplicate. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. and close the exercise file. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Modify. for Show title.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click Edit/New. 19 Select the view on the sheet. . click Modify. and on the Options Bar.

630 .

expand Floor Plans. You also learn to create different types of schedules.rvt.Level 1. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Because of the open style floor plan. in your Revit MEP 2009 projects. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. Tagging Objects In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as room and window schedules. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. 631 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as doors and windows.Tagging and Scheduling 11 In this tutorial. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.

2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. as shown: 632 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click in the Design Bar. click Room Separation. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Room and Area. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Using the same method.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 633 .6 Using the same method. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. 9 In the Tags dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

17 Zoom in on the tag number. click it. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. click Room. The room tag number displays in blue. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 634 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. type 8'. click OK. click Modify.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. verify that Tag on placement is selected. type U18-1. 11 In the Tags dialog. and press ENTER. and select the room tag. 13 On the Options Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 16 On the Design Bar.rfa. indicating that it can be edited. and click to place the room and tag. 14 For Offset.

23 Using the same method. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. type Entry. 22 Click the room text label. and press ENTER.18 Click the room text label. type Kitchen. Dining. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 635 . NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. click Modify. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. click Room. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Click to place the new room and tag. 19 On the Design Bar. place rooms and tags. and press ENTER.

27 On the Design Bar. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. on the Model Categories tab. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 636 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. The rooms are already placed. click Room Tag. expand Lines. and moving clockwise.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Modify. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. clear Room Separation.Level 2. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). but they need to be tagged.

3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. clear Leader. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. expand Floor Plans. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser. you learn how to place door and window tags. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 637 .30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.

and on the Options Bar. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. type U18-2. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. type U18-1. under Identify Data. and press ENTER. for Mark. and click OK.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. 638 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Properties).

rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. Tagging Doors and Windows | 639 . 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

and click OK. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. and double-click Level 1. verify that All objects in current view is selected. and click OK. click Training Files. select Door Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog. 640 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. click Tag All Not Tagged. 15 Under Category. double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans. click Tag All Not Tagged. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser.Level 2. click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag.rfa. select Window Tags.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 At the confirmation prompt.rvt. expand Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. select Leader. you learn how to tag furniture objects. tag all untagged windows.rfa. 29 Save the file. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Other Objects | 641 . Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select a dining room chair. 26 Under Floor Plans. click Yes to load a tag. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents.Level 1.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. select the edge to which the leader connects. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 28 Using the same method. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Training Files. and modify the tag placement and display.

14 Click Modify. clear Leader. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). and on the Options Bar. 12 Click the elbow control.8 Select the furniture in the living room. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. and drag it above the chair tag. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 642 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 Optionally. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 9 Click Modify. 11 Select the tag for the table.

select Furniture Tag : Standard. click Modify.Level 2. and on the Design Bar. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. 18 On the Design Bar. Tagging Other Objects | 643 . Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Floor Plans.

22 In the Type Selector. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. 644 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. and click Modify. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tags. 23 Save the file. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. 21 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection). click Check None. you learn to add schedules.20 On the Options Bar.

Finally. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Next. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. in which windows are listed by window type. Creating a Window Schedule | 645 . Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. that is.

3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. 646 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. click Training Files. under Category. and click OK. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click the Fields tab. expand Floor Plans. 7 Using the same method. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Schedule/Quantities.rvt. select Comments and click Add. select Windows. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. right-click in the Design Bar. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and double-click Level 1. 4 For Name. 6 Under Available fields. 9 Click OK. type Building Window Schedule. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.

Creating a Window Schedule | 647 . click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. this can be a time-consuming process. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. you are prompted to open one that does. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. right-click the schedule. in large building models with many views.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. If no open view shows the selected element. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. 13 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click Show. NOTE By clicking Show. click Close. expand Schedules/Quantities. However.

15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. 23 Click OK twice. for Sort by. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed. under Other. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. 648 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. and click View Properties. sorted by type mark. The window type schedule is displayed. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. clear Itemize every instance. for Sorting/Grouping. and press ENTER. under Other. click Edit.

jamb. expand Schedules/Quantities. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 649 . These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. and double-click Building Window Schedule. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In this case. you cannot use them to tag objects. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. and sill conditions for a window can be found. unlike shared parameters. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. double-click Level 2. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt.

right-click Building Window Schedule. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under. 650 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Available fields. 12 Click OK twice. type Head Detail. and click Properties. click Add to create the new parameter. select the following fields. 5 Click OK. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Type. click OK. click Edit.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. for Name. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select Construction. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. under Other. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. for Fields. so that they are listed before Comments. 6 Using the same method. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail.

expand Floor Plans. and Sill Detail.Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. under Type Mark A. type 1/A107. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. for Head Detail. click Schedule/Quantities. type 2/A107. 17 Save the file. TIP To select all 3 headers. click in the Head Detail header. click Group. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 651 . move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Doors. type Window Details. type 3/A107. For example. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. and without releasing the left mouse button. You then hide the column used for the filter.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. type Unit 18 . and for Sill Detail. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Jamb Detail. Under Name. select Head Detail. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Jamb Detail. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.Level 1. 14 On the Options Bar.

Unit 18. 11 Under Field formatting. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. verify that New Construction is selected. expand Sheets (all). 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Mark. 6 Under Available fields. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. select Hidden field. Type U18 in the third field. select the following fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. select Family and Type. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 4 Click OK. and double-click A102 . 9 Click the Formatting tab. 652 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by.■ For Phase. 10 Under Fields. click the Fields tab. and click OK. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. but is not included as a column in the schedule. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). Select contains in the second field.

Door Schedule.13 In the Project Browser. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. click Modify. click Unit 18 . 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 653 . 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it to the sheet.

select Rooms. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. under Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 Using the same method. 8 Click OK. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. 7 Under Text. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. and click Add. select Bold. 654 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .20 Save the file. select Number. click Schedule/Quantities. double-click Level 1.rvt. to the right of Header text. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. and click OK. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click View. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. under Available fields. under Category. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

10 Edit the number to be 101. and press ENTER. Creating a Room Schedule | 655 . For 106. and press ENTER. For 102. click New. type Storage. type Building Entry. type Stair. and press ENTER. for room 101. For 103. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. select Corridor. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. 101-106. next to Rows. For 104. The room Number is U17-46. type Corridor. select Storage. for Name.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. add 5 more rooms. For 105. 11 Using the same method. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule.

Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. click the Lines field. 4 Click OK twice. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Override. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. First. under Visibility. For Weight. For Room Separation. click Room Separation. In the Line Graphics dialog.rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and modify room names. double-click Level 1. click the Color field. select 9. 656 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Under Custom colors. under Floor Plans. you add room separation lines. expand Lines. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. place rooms from a program list. under Projection/Surface. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. click the bright green swatch. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. draw the horizontal line. and click OK. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.13 Save the file. In the Lines field. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.

click Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 657 .8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.

14 For Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. type 8'. for Room. for Room. 11 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 658 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select 101 Building Entry. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).

double-click Level 1. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. place the following rooms. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 20 While pressing CTRL.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 17 On the Design Bar. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). click Modify. double-click Room Schedule. 16 Using the same method. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 659 . under Schedules/Quantities. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.

and click OK. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. for Rows. under Available fields. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. and for all 3 finishes. select Base Finish. and click Add. click Modify. 31 For Key Name. click 23 On the Design Bar. select Rooms. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar.21 On the Options Bar. under Category. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. under Constraints. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. while pressing CTRL. and click OK. and Wall Finish. 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Select Schedule keys. 660 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . type As Selected. click New. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. (Element Properties). 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Open the Room Schedule. type Units. click Schedule/Quantities. Floor Finish. clear Room Bounding.

under Schedules/Quantities. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 On the Options Bar. for Available fields. under Other. click Edit. 36 Click OK twice. 37 Open the Room Schedule. under Floor Plans. for Fields. select Units. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. for Room Style. under Identity Data. click Check None. and click Add. and click OK. select Rooms. right-click Room Schedule. 33 In the Project Browser. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents.32 Using the same method. 43 In the Filter dialog. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. and click Properties. 38 Under U17-8. select Room Style. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 661 . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). select Units. click (Element Properties). double-click Level 1. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 44 On the Options Bar. for Room Style.

6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 103. and click Properties. at the warning prompt. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. select Service. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click OK. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and 106. 662 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Views (all). 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Room Style. type Room Type. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Public. 9 In the Project Browser. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. click 5 For Title. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. For rooms 102 and 105. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. right-click Level 1. and click OK. for Color. under Graphics. for Name. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. under Floor Plans. type Room Type. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101.rvt.46 Open the Room Schedule. (Duplicate). 104. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and apply it to the Level 1 view. expand Floor Plans. 48 Save the file. click the Color Scheme field.

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 663 . 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click the value in the Color column. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 14 Click OK twice. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. and clear Room Separation. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. select Room Type. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. click Edit. select the color legend. expand Lines. under Schemes. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). under Visibility. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click OK.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Edit Color Scheme. click Modify. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. clear Visible. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

28 Under Title Text. and click OK. and select Show Title. click Modify. for Swatch Width. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select blue. for Size. type 1/4''. 30 On the Design Bar. type 1''. on the Options Bar. under Custom color. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray.22 In the Color dialog. under Graphics. 23 Using the same method. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK. 29 Click OK twice. (Element Properties). respectively. 664 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .

and click OK. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. double-click Building Section.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Properties. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Sections. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. select Room Type. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 35 Click OK twice. under Visibility. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. for Color Scheme. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. click Edit. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. right-click Building Section. under Sections. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 665 . select Rooms. under Graphics.

under Identity Data. for Room Style. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. and click OK.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. and click OK. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. select Public. select all the rooms in the stairwell. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 46 Click . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Check None. (Filter Selection). under Identity Data. and click OK. select Units. 666 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Rooms. for Room Style. 41 On the Options Bar. click .

select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. for Rows. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. under Key Name for the new row. 54 While pressing CTRL. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. excluding the stairwell spaces. double-click Room Style Schedule. select Service. under Schedules/Quantities. 51 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click . type Suites. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 667 . for Room Style. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Identity Data. click New.

and click OK. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. The color fill will extend to the roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. select Areas and Volumes. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. under Volume Computations.55 Click . select Suites. for Room Style. and click OK. under Identity Data. but not beyond it. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that At wall finish is selected. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 668 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 59 Under Room Area Computation. The color fill extends to the roof. select the room on the left side of the top floor. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area.

66 Click OK. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). and click 65 For Limit Offset. select the stairwell room. for Upper Limit. 68 Click . click Modify.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. type -10”. and the living room. select Level 2. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 669 . 67 On the first level. the dining room. under Constraints. type 0’ 0” . 70 For Limit Offset. 72 On the Design Bar. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 71 Click OK. under Constraints. for Upper Limit. . select Loft.

you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. 670 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .73 Save the file. double-click {3D}.rvt. under 3D Views. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.

Select Grand totals. click Family and Type. select Family and Type. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse.Insulation on Plywood Deck .EPDM. 5 On the Design Bar. Creating a Material Takeoff | 671 . select Material: Description.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 3 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Roofs. 4 In the Type Selector. and click OK. For Then by. under Category. 9 Using the same method. under Available fields. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and click Add. Clear Itemize every instance. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.

50 1. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.75 672 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 For Formula. select Calculate totals. click the Formatting tab. for Material: Cost. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Calculate totals. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 23 For Field formatting. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. 17 Click Calculated Value.25 4. Under Field formatting. under Available fields.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Material: Area. for Name. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). select Material: Cost. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. and click Add. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 19 For Type. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. click Edit. for Fields. 21 Click OK. type Estimated Cost. and under Fields. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. and click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Currency. click Estimated Cost. under Other.

27 In the Format dialog. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. for Currency. creating a generic tag to tag the family. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. You draw a travel path line. for Rounding. click the Format value. select $. These shared parameters can be added to any family. 31 Save the file. 28 For Unit symbol. you create an exiting plan for the building. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and schedule the total distance of each path. which inserts commas after every three digits. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. and reporting the shared parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 673 . ensuring consistency across families and projects. tag the line. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. 26 In the Project Units dialog. and are defined and stored in an external file. Digit grouping. In this lesson. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. you create a shared parameter file. 29 Select Use digit grouping. not just for currency. either within family components or within the project template. adding the shared parameters to a family. regardless of category.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. can be used for any number-based parameter. 30 Click OK twice.

double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. click New. select Length. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. and click Save. click Training Files. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.rvt. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. and click OK. type Travel Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for File name. type Path ID. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 9 Under Parameters. click Create. 11 Click OK twice. 7 Under Parameters. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Training Files. type Exiting.rvt. for Name. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. for Type of Parameter. under Groups. click New.txt. 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 674 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click New. under Floor Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.

Click Training Files. 14 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. and click OK. and click OK. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. for Travel Distance Formula. 11 Click OK. under Dimensions. 8 Select Instance. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. under Parameters. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 4 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.rvt. otherwise the family loads into the current project. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. select Shared parameter. If you have multiple projects open. select Constraints. following the equals symbol (=). You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 10 Using the same method. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and select Instance. click Load into Projects. under Parameter Data. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. 13 Click Apply. and click OK. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. group it under Dimensions. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add. under Parameter Type. click Add.rfa. for Group parameter under. 15 If necessary. type Length. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 675 . in the Load into Projects dialog. and click Select.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 12 In the Family Types dialog.

click Select. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Travel Distance. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. click (Add Parameter). and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag.rft. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. select Travel Distance.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. under Category Parameters. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. click Label. 24 Click OK twice. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 676 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click parameter(s) to label). under Parameters. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

click Modify. 35 Save the file. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. and click Save. and click OK. for File Name. click Load into Projects. and move it down.28 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. type Travel Distance Tag.rfa. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 32 In the Save As dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 29 In the drawing window. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 677 .rvt is selected. select Path ID. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.Level 1.rvt. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 678 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. click Component. above the exterior door as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. double-click Exiting Plan . 6 Move the cursor to the right. select Chain. and click in the center of the corridor. After the lines are tagged. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.Tagging. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise.Placing.

and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 13 While pressing CTRL. click Modify.Tagging. select the 2 dashed travel lines. and click OK.7 Move the cursor down. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 679 . 10 On the Options Bar. and click outside of the building. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click Component. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner. Placing. through the door. clear Leader. 8 On the Design Bar. verify that Chain is selected. 12 On the Design Bar. double click Exiting Plan . 17 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). for Path ID. 11 Select each of the travel path lines.Level 2. type 1-1. under Constraints. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Modify. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category.

and click above the door to the stair.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. 23 Move the cursor down. click Modify. click Component. and click in the stair. and click. 680 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path.

26 Select each of the travel path lines. under Category. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.24 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. 33 For Name. under Constraints. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 30 Using the same method. for Path ID. and click OK. type 2-1. . click Modify. type Level 1 Exit Distance. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. Placing. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click OK. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 681 .Tagging.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. select Travel Distance.rvt. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. in the second field. 43 In the Project Browser. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 35 Click the Filter tab. type Level 2 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 36 For Filter by. and click Properties. type 2-. and under Field formatting. 44 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. select Calculate totals. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 38 For Sort by. and click OK. 41 Under Fields. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. 50 Save the file. type 1-. and in the third field.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 682 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . in the third field. select Path ID. and click Rename. select contains. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. under Other. select Path ID and Travel Distance. in the first field. 46 In the Project Browser. 42 Click OK. 49 Click OK twice. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. for Filter. under Available fields. select Path ID. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. while pressing CTRL. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. for Filter by. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit. click Training Files.

Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 4 Under Available fields. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. under Identity Data. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Partitions . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. under Categories. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Fixed Partitions.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Drywall w/ Metal Stud. for Assembly Code. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 683 .6''. expand C . and click View. click the Value field. 10 In the schedule. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click Generic . right-click the Design Bar. 9 Click OK twice. and click Properties. and select C1010145 . select Walls.Interiors ➤ C10 . and click . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the following fields.

NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 684 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. type Revit_Project.mdb. 6 Click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Create. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Database Name. click Training Files. and click Next. 3 Click New. click the File Data Source tab. the database display may be different than that shown. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. and click OK to create the database. 11 Click OK 3 times. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.mdb). click OK. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays.rvt. 9 Under Directories. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. and click Next. 1 On the File menu. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. under Database.11 Close the exercise file. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. select a location for the database file. 8 In the New Database dialog.

tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. Additionally. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. 13 Close the exercise file.Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. For example. in addition to the Id column. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 685 . Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements.

686 .

You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2009 projects. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 687 . you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.Annotating and Dimensioning 12 In this tutorial. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. 688 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise.

to better demonstrate how shared levels work. 6 Click OK twice. and click OK. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. and double-click South. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. for Elevation Base.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). Relocating a Project | 689 . In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated.Shared Elevation. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. If you did that now. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 8 Select the Level 1 line. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click (Element Properties). Under Constraints. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. click Training Files. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Name dialog. select Shared. The levels in the project are not shared. However. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. type 1/4'' Head . Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'.

10 On the View menu. you specify the new location of the project. 12 In the Type Selector. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. The south elevation is displayed. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line.By selecting the Level 1 line. select Level : 1/4'' Head . 690 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and press ENTER. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. click Modify. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. By typing 325' in this step. 13 On the Design Bar.Shared Elevation. The base elevation now reads 325'. type 325'. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project.

15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. under Elevations. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click North. as well as other views of the building model. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. Relocating a Project | 691 . and the Roof Plan level. the Penthouse level. select Levels 2-4.

On the Design Bar. multi-segmented. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. and angular dimensions. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. click File menu ➤ Save As. select Level : 1/4'' Head . although you must turn on their visibility to view them. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Modify. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. Dimensioning In this lesson. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components.Shared Elevation. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. 692 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . In this case. In Revit MEP.■ ■ In the Type Selector. permanent dimensions are created automatically. radial. Dimensioning on page 692. 16 If you want to save your changes. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. You place linear.

select it. dimensions are aligned. and double-click Level 1. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. click Dimension. snap to wall centerlines. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. By default. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall. and are created by selecting individual reference points. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Dimensions | 693 .Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. select it. 694 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 5 Move the cursor above the view. and click to place the dimension. and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall.

The lock displays as locked. and select it.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. click Dimension. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. Creating Dimensions | 695 . indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

but below the first dimension that you placed. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. select Wall Faces. and select its left exterior face. select the right side of the curtain wall. 14 Move the cursor to the right. select the right endpoint of the planter. above the plan view of the building. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 696 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 16 Move the cursor up. for Prefer. 12 On the Options Bar.11 Using the same method.

The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions | 697 . Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. and on the Options Bar. .Ordinate. 18 On the Basics tab. and click OK. 27 Click OK twice. under Graphics. for Dimension String Type. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.3/32" Arial . View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. click Modify. enter Linear . and click OK.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. for Dimension String Type. 22 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. enter Linear . select Baseline.Baseline. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.3/32" Arial . select Ordinate.

enter Planter.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. select Linear . or to the right of a permanent dimension value. for Below. . for example Text dialog displays. 698 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 34 Click OK. verify that Use Actual Value is selected. to the left.29 Select the dimension string. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog.3/32" Arial . 30 In the Type Selector. below. under Dimension Value. select Linear . Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. and in the Type Selector. 33 Under Text Fields.Baseline.

click Modify. and select it. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. and specify a point to place the dimension.35 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 699 . 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. 37 On the Design Bar. For Prefer. select Wall faces. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). click Dimension. click Modify.

43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. click Modify. 700 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog.42 Select the radial dimension. 46 On the Basics tab. 44 With the dimension still selected. and click OK. type Typ. for Suffix..

click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 701 . This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. verify that Wall faces is selected. 50 Select the horizontal line. For Prefer.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 702. click Modify. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. and click to place the dimension. expand Views (all). Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. When you dimension the wall. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. you select only the wall. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. 702 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 53 On the Basics tab. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 3. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. expand Floor Plans. 54 Proceed to the next exercise.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. click Dimension. select Entire Walls. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. Click Options. Click OK. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 703 .Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Pick. and click to place the automatic dimension string. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. select Openings. select Wall centerlines. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. and select Widths.

2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. expand Floor Plans. However. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. and double-click Level 1. for a multi-segmented dimension. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. For example.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Witness Lines on page 704. When you place dimensions. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise.7 On the Basics tab. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. 704 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . expand Views (all). click Modify. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. in some cases.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Individual References. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. For Pick. and select it. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. click Dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 705 . verify Wall centerlines is selected. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer.

move the cursor down. 10 Using the same method. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. and select it. select the right edge of the planter. 706 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the bottom right endpoint.7 Using the same method.

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan.11 Move the cursor down. Controlling Witness Lines | 707 . and when the wall centerline highlights. select Wall centerlines. 13 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. for Prefer. and specify a point to place the dimension. select it.

18 While pressing SHIFT.15 Moving the cursor to the right. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 708 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 19 Release SHIFT. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. and click to place the dimension. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. and drag the dimension down the wall. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. text font. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. After you create the new family type. drag it to the right. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 709 . click Modify. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 22 On the Basics tab. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and using the same methods.20 Click the blue middle grip. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 709. you change the dimension tick mark. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall.

for Tick Mark. 710 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Arrow 30 Degree. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. and select the lower dimension.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Click (Element Properties). Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. click Duplicate. type Office Standard.

7 On the Basics tab. click Modify. click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 711 . The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. select another font. and select the bottom dimension. ■ Click OK twice. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. type 1/8”. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. For Text Font. for Text Size.■ ■ Under Text. select CityBlueprint. 10 On the Basics tab.

11 Using the same method. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. and how to add leaders to the text notes. create a new angular dimension type. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. 712 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the angular dimension on the planter. Creating Text Annotation on page 712. 12 Proceed to the next lesson.

click (None).rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 713 . for Leader. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Text. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. zoom to the planter near grid line 5.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click and drag to create a text box. but below the upper dimension string.

click Duplicate. click Edit/New. select Arc Leaders. type EXISTING BUILDING. 11 Under Text. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 714 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click . 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. and click OK. If so. and click OK. type 1/4''. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. 7 Select the text box. and click OK.5 In the text box. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. for Text Size. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. 10 In the Name dialog box.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 715 . ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. click Text. click Modify. and type Planting Bed. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

24 On the Design Bar. for New. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. Click OK twice. Under Graphics. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 716 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. select CityBlueprint. click Edit/New. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. type Standard Notes. for Text Font. for Leader Arrowhead. In the Rename dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. Under Text. click Modify. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. Click Rename. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. click Modify.

30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. click to place the text box. for Leader. 27 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 717 . select Text: Standard Notes. 26 In the Type Selector.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. click (Arc). and type 18'' Conc. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. click Text. over the Planting Bed text. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. Wall. and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 718 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. like a standard door header condition. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In the callout view. add detail components. and metal studs. In order to detail from the building model. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. plywood. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. These components display at the required scale. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building.Detailing 13 In this tutorial. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. 719 . You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you trace over the building model geometry. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2009.

for Graphics ➤ Display Model.rfa. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes to load a Detail Items family.Detailing the View In this exercise. and insulation objects. The roof overhang detail displays. double-click the detail callout head. click Training Files. select As underlay. and click Open. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 720 | Chapter 13 Detailing . After you add components. Exact location is not important. 7 In the drawing area. which means that all detail components. click Detail Component. region objects. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. as well as detail lines.rvt. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the alert dialog. click Training Files. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you detail the view of the roof edge. You load detail components. They are also view specific.

17 In the drawing area.8 Delete the component. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Repeating Detail. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. click (Element Properties). click Edit/New. enter 1' 4". for Pattern ➤ Detail. 16 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. 10 On the Options Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. and click OK. Detailing the View | 721 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 15 For Spacing. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. select Corrugated Metal. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail.

25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Load. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. click Training Files. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component.19 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. ■ ■ Click Modify. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. 24 In the Type Selector.rfa. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 722 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click Open. click Modify. 22 On the Options Bar. click (Move).

Because you still have several components to load. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and place it in the detail view as shown. press SPACEBAR 3 times. you load them as a group from a single file. 30 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click OK. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components.rvt. 31 To properly orient the component. and click Open. Detailing the View | 723 . select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. click Detail Component. 33 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. and click Modify. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select Chain. 724 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click the Flip instance arrows. 37 Click Modify.

enter 5 1/2". 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. as shown. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. (Move). 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click Insulation. 42 Click Modify. select to near side. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Detailing the View | 725 . For Offset. and on the Edit toolbar.

click Detail Component. 726 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 47 In the Type Selector. 45 In the Type Selector. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select Plywood-Section : 3/4".■ Click Modify. 51 Click Modify. as shown. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. and lock the component. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component.

as shown. Adding Detail Lines on page 727. click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Thin Lines. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. enter 1/4". meaning they display only in this view. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. select Thin Lines. and press ENTER. you add lines to your detail. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 7 In the Type Selector. they are view specific. Adding Detail Lines | 727 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 4 Click Modify. Like detail components.rvt. For Offset.52 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. 2 In the Type Selector.

select Chain.10 On the Design Bar. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. and draw the detail lines as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. as shown. click (Draw). 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. 728 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and clear Chain. as shown. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. enter 1/4". 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset.

20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select Thin Lines. select Do not display. Adding Detail Lines | 729 . and click OK. and click Properties. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. for Graphics ➤ Display Model.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the View Control Bar. draw the detail lines as shown. select the Penthouse level line. right-click. When you turn the display model off. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. 18 In the Type Selector. 22 In the Project Browser. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 30 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. select Vapor Barrier.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 26 In the Type Selector. select Break Line. 730 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 29 On the Design Bar. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. click Detail Lines. click Detail Component. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. enter 1/2". For Offset.

Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Text. you add text notes to complete the detail. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes on page 731. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes | 731 . Enter the text. and click to place the dimension. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.32 Click Modify. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. Adding Text Notes In this exercise.rvt. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Roof Overhang Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select a text note.. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. enter Roof Overhang Detail . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. on the Options Bar. and click the dimension text. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click OK. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Creating Detail Components on page 732. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog.7 Click Modify. enter Typ. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. under Text Fields. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area.Keynotes. right-click. (Filter Selection). 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click. 732 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click Rename. and press DELETE. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Select All Instances.rvt. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file. right-click. for Suffix. 8 Select the dimension line. and click OK.

click Training Files. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. pressing TAB. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 7 Click Modify.rft. while pressing CTRL. and click Open. and selecting the chain. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 15 Use a window to select all linework.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. select all the coping linework. select Medium Lines. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 14 Click Modify. 16 Click Modify. in the Type Selector. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Creating Detail Components | 733 . navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component.

select the coping.rfa. 26 Press DELETE.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 27 On the Design Bar. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 18 In the Save As dialog.Keynotes view is not the open view. 24 On the Options Bar. click Load. and click OK. 23 Using a window. 30 In the drawing area. enter Roof Edge. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 21 To place the component. 22 Click Modify. and click Open. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 31 Using the same method used previously. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. Adding Keynotes on page 735. 734 | Chapter 13 Detailing . double-click it in the Project Browser. navigate to your preferred location. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. delete the underlying linework. click Load into Projects. click . NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . The original linework remains selected. for File name. and click Save. 28 On the Options Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. While pressing SHIFT. clear Detail Items. and the component can be placed in the detail. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Component. click Detail Component. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 25 In the Filter dialog.

C1. click Keynote ➤ Element. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click OK. Roof Edge4. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 2 In the alert dialog. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. For the metal coping.rfa. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. use keynote 06160. and click Open.rvt.B5. Click to place the leader arm. In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Keynotes | 735 . use keynote 07645.D11. 3/4" Plywood. you place keynotes on objects. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. click Training Files. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them.

D1. 15 In the Type Selector. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. select the metal fascia with drip edge.F1. FasciaProfile_1. 18 Save the file. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . using keynote 07460. 17 Keynote the component. 11 Click OK 3 times. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component. You do this in order to keynote the component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. For the 2x8. 12 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. For the 2x6. For the 2x12. and click . For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element. 736 | Chapter 13 Detailing . use keynote 06160. select Corrugated Metal.A8. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.G1. click in the Value column.6 Click Modify.F1. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. use keynote 06110. use keynote 09250.D11. use keynote 06110. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.I1. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. use keynote 06110. navigate to 07645. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 737. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.20 Ga.

for File name. click Lines. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.rft. click Edit/New. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the drawing area.rvt. select Medium Lines. click Detail Component. 9 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the component. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 4 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. and select the right end point. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. select the left end point of the reference line. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to your preferred location. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 11 Press DELETE. and click Modify. click Load. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. and click Open. 13 In the Type Selector. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Training Files. 19 In the Name dialog. and click Save. 6 Lock the line. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 737 . click Load into Projects. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Duplicate. and click (Element Properties). select Medium Line Detail Component. 15 Click Modify. 8 In the Save As dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 20 Click OK 3 times. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 18 In the Type Properties dialog.

23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click . 29 In the drawing area. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 In the Keynotes dialog.A5. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 28 In the Type Selector. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. enter EPDM Membrane. and click . select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 49 With the component selected. 46 Click Modify. against the 3/4" plywood. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. and click the lower end at the break line. and click Open. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. invisible.A1. and click OK. 44 On the Design Bar. 25 Next. 48 Using the same method used previously. 27 On the Design Bar. 738 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select i_Light Line Detail Component. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang.G1. and click . name the component Air Barrier. 24 While pressing CTRL. 37 Click OK 3 times. 42 Using the same method used previously. and hidden) used in the view. click Training Files. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. i_Invisible Line Detail Component. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. and assign it keynote 07260. (Move). 40 Click Modify. and assign it keynote 06110. click Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar. 47 Select the component. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 31 Select the component. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click . navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 41 Select the component just added. click in the Value column. click Duplicate. 38 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Name dialog. and i_Light Line Detail Component.

52 In the Type Selector.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 55 Click Modify. leaving the detail component lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 739 . 53 On the Options Bar. select Chain. and click . 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component.

rfa. 60 On the Design Bar. 2 x 8 Framing. Air Barrier. select Invisible Lines. 740 | Chapter 13 Detailing .rfa. and assign it keynote 07260. in the Type Selector. click Keynote ➤ Element. and Vapor Barrier. click Detail Component. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 63 In the drawing area. click Load into Projects.58 Using the method used previously. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 67 In the Type Selector. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.A4. select the component. name the component Vapor Barrier. 68 In the drawing area. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 61 In the drawing area. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.

2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. under Keynote Table. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 72 Save the file.A1.A4. click File menu ➤ Save. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. and assign it keynote 07210. 11 Click Modify. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. click Keynote ➤ Element. select Absolute. add a keynote for the component. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. In the Type Selector. Each keynote displays as a simple number. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. and press TAB.rvt. and click Open.txt. Enter 07463. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and click . and click OK. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. select all the keynotes. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 741. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. Enter 07460. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.A9. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. 3 In the text editor. click Browse. and click OK. name the component Batt Insul. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 9 In the drawing area. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 71 In the drawing area. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.69 Select the component. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. and close the text editor.A1. The database file opens in a text editor. and press ENTER. navigate to 07463. and press TAB. 70 Using the method used previously. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). under Path Type.txt. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 741 . click to place the leader. and click to place the note.

Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. select 3" = 1'-0". Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. After you create a drafting view. verify that Auto . These details do not update with changes to the building model. For Colors.dwg. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. for Scale. 14 Save the file. click Training Files. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 13 Click Modify. select Black and White. For Positioning. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and click OK. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. 742 | Chapter 13 Detailing .Center to Center is selected. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. The detail that you import is in DWG format. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. you learn how to create a drafted detail.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model.

select Reference other view. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.■ Click Open.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. and click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Creating a Reference Callout | 743 . The detail is imported as an import symbol. 3 On the Options Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Creating a Reference Callout on page 743. right-click Drafting 1. 5 Click Modify. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Select the callout. enter EPDM Metal Coping. click Callout. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser.

drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.Elev. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Rename. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays./Details. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 744 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Modify. The callout head no longer displays a reference label.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. delete the existing value. double-click A105 . and double-click the callout. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. for New. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. enter Detail ./Sect.No Reference). for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. and click Properties. 10 In the Rename dialog. 12 Click OK twice. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.

you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Header @ Sliding Door. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. for Name.rvt. 3 On the View Control Bar. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". and click OK. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 745 .18 Save the file. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 745 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Draw a rectangle as shown. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 17 Click Modify. select the width dimension. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. enter Gyp. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 14 Click OK 3 times. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. select the left and bottom edges of the region. On the Options Bar. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Region Properties. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select Gypsum-Plaster. click Filled Region. 11 In the Name dialog. 18 While pressing CTRL. select Wide Lines. 20 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. Board. click Edit/New. 16 Select the left edge of the region. and enter 5/8". click . 746 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. click Finish Sketch. for Name.5 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.

click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror).Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. click 22 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the mirrored region. and click above the top of the region as the end point. (Draw). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 747 . Move the cursor up. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. and on the Edit toolbar.

29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 748 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.25 Click Modify. select Wood . Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. click (Rectangle). and select the right edge of the wood region. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines.Finish. 33 Click OK 3 times. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that the thickness is 3/4". click Filled Region. Draw a rectangle as shown. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.Finish. click Edit/New. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. On the Options Bar. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click (Align). for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. for Name. enter Wood . click Region Properties. in the Type Selector. 30 In the Name dialog.

click . Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. enter 1/4". select Medium Lines.37 On the Design Bar. 38 On the Design Bar. For Offset. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Finish Sketch. 42 On the Design Bar. verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". and press ENTER. click Finish Sketch. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). sketch the new region as shown. 39 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 749 . click Filled Region. click Ref Plane.

enter 3/8". and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. and click to select the point. and press ENTER. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Move the cursor down 1'. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 1". 750 | Chapter 13 Detailing .46 On the Tools toolbar. click Filled Region. Select Chain. For Offset. enter 0. click 48 Click Modify. 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor right 1". 47 Click the reference plane. For Offset. (Align). and press ENTER.

and select the bottom horizontal line. top. 56 On the Design Bar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click Detail Lines. For Offset. enter 1/8". 60 Select the left. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Sketch. and right edges of the door panel region. select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 751 .54 On the Tools toolbar. 58 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar.

click Detail Component. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. select the height dimension. 62 Select the left detail line. 752 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Training Files.rfa. enter 3". 65 On the Options Bar. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.61 Click Modify. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. and click Open. click Load. 69 Select the bolt. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. and press ENTER. 68 Click Modify. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

80 On the Options Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 753 . click . click Detail Lines. click Load. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 76 In the Type Selector. 71 On the Options Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Wide Lines.rfa. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6.70 On the Design Bar. 78 On the Design Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. use the images as a guide. click Detail Lines. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. select Thin Lines. click Training Files. click Detail Component. and click Open. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail.

click . click Detail Lines. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. (Mirror). click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 754 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and on the Edit toolbar. 87 Click Modify. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 85 On the Options Bar.82 Select the rectangle. 84 On the Design Bar.

click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 755 . as shown. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 92 Select the line.89 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. click (Mirror). Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. and on the Edit toolbar.

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click . and click to place the arc as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. 103 Add two break lines as shown. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 99 Click Modify. 101 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. select Break Line. 95 On the Design Bar. enter 1/8". click Detail Component. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. select the length dimension. 756 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and press ENTER.94 Select the mirrored line on the right.

107 Select the dimension line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 757 . select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Edit/New. 113 Click OK 3 times. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. 105 In the drawing area. click Dimension. click Duplicate. 114 On the Design Bar. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. click Dimension. 110 In the Name dialog. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. and click Modify. The dimension display is updated. Select Suppress 0 Feet. and click OK. For Rounding. 106 Click to place the dimension. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. the new style displays only inches.3/32" Arial. . 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select To the nearest 1/16". You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. click in the Value column. for Text ➤ Units Format.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. enter Detail Linear .

123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 117 Select the dimension line. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. enter See Schedule. 120 Under Text Fields. and then click the dimension text. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. for Below. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. using the Drag Text grip. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. 758 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 121 Click OK. click Dimension. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. drag the text for the smaller dimension. select Replace With Text.3/32”Arial. and click Modify. under Dimension Value.115 In the Type Selector. and enter Varies.

130 Click OK.125 Select Modify to end the command. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. 128 Click OK. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 759 . 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. select Replace With Text. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. and click the dimension text.

click Text. and click Modify.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. 760 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 132 In the Options Bar. 139 Save the file. select the gypsum board region on the left. 135 Select the note. Board. 138 On the Design Bar. click to create an arced leader. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click Modify to end the command. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click (Add Right Arc Leader). and on the Options Bar. 134 Enter Gyp. 133 In the drawing area. and click to place the text.

The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 761 .rvt. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. click Training Files. and double-click East.Finishing the Sheets 14 In this tutorial. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets.

5 On the Options Bar. for Number of Leaders.rfa. type 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Modify. 762 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .Hexagon.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the keynote. 7 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. click Training Files. click Symbol. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

for Text.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. under Identity Data. and click OK. Creating a Note Block | 763 . type Seal existing doors and insulate. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. click (Copy). and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Element Properties). 13 Select the tag.

click Copy. 15 For Text. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 18 Using the same method. on the Edit toolbar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. type Repair existing door surround. 16 For Tag. 764 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and on the Options Bar.14 With the copy selected. and click. on the Options Bar. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. (Mirror). 17 Click OK. type B. click (Element Properties). 19 With the tag selected. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays.

Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. 22 Optionally. Clean existing concrete loading dock. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair existing door surround. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Tuckpoint as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. using the table as a reference. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.21 On the Design Bar. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 765 . Clean exterior brick wall. Remove all existing windows. click Modify. Repair as required.

On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 29 In the Project Browser. select Tag. and select Bold. select Tag. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block.Elevations. under Available fields. 766 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . for Header text. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and click Add. expand Schedules/Quantities. for the value. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and click Add. type Description. for Sort by. 28 In the Project Browser. for Note block name. and drag it to the sheet. Clean cut and repair wall as required. type 1/4''. and double-click A103 . Create. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. format. type Mark. 26 Click OK. select Exterior Construction Notes. expand Sheets (all). select Center. On the Formatting tab. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and click OK.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. verify that Arial is selected. Select Text. for Heading. type Exterior Construction Notes. 27 In the column header (text). On the Appearance tab. and for Alignment. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.

rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.31 On the Design Bar. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all). click Modify. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Using Drawing Lists | 767 . Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.

■ 4 Click OK. double-click T . select Sheet Number. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Filter by. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 768 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and click Add.Title Sheet. select does not equal. under Sheets (all). select Sheet Index. Select Sheet Name. 6 In the Project Browser. and in the third field.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. in the first field. expand Schedules/Quantities. The drawing list displays. 5 In the list title field. under Available fields. type T. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. and click Add. in the second field. 7 In the Project Browser. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. and drag it to the sheet. select Sheet Number. for Sort by. select Sheet Number. On the Filter tab.

Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. For the text. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. windows. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. On construction documents. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.9 On the Design Bar. Finally. and door frames. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. doors. door frame schedule. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. click Modify. and so on). On construction documents. Training File Using Legends | 769 . 11 Save the file.

select Arial. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 770 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . for Name.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 10 For Text Size. click Text. 6 On the Options Bar. type Legend Text.Open Level Head . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 9 For Text Font. type 1/8''. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Symbol. you create a text type with the necessary size. click Duplicate. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . for Name. type Typical Symbol Legend. click Edit/New. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click . Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote . and click OK twice. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.

verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. expand Legends.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. and for Leader. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. Creating a Symbol Legend | 771 . verify that is selected. 16 In the Project Browser. 14 Working from the top down. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and double-click A101 .Site Plan/Floor Plan. click Typical Symbol Legend. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). and click to place it.

772 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser.Unit 18.17 In the Type Selector. click Modify. under Sheets. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click A102 . 23 Save the file. and click to place it. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet.

3 For Scale. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. For View. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 9 Select the second wall. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. for Family. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Modify. and press ENTER. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. click Legend Component. 8 On the Design Bar. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Creating a Component Legend | 773 .rvt. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. type 3'. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Section. and on the Options Bar. for Name. For Host length. type 4th Floor Wall Types. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''.

12 On the Options Bar.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. click Text. click to add text without a leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 11 In the Type Selector. for Leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 774 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.

pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click to add text with a single-segment leader. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 18 Type the following text. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. Creating a Component Legend | 775 .

Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. select Level 4. under Floor Plans. right-click Sheets (all). and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. and click New Sheet. under Legends. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. 776 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and drag it to the new sheet. drag it onto the sheet.

Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. select the Wall Type 2 component. under Floor Plans. click Modify to end the command. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. double-click Level 4. click (Match Type).25 On the Design Bar. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. Creating a Component Legend | 777 . The open drawings are both visible. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser.

32 In the floor plan view. select Detail Level: Medium. 33 Select the patio divider wall. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 778 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 34 On the View Control Bar. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. You can create a sequence of revisions. Using the table. In this exercise.35 Optionally. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. contractor inquiries. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Using Revision Tracking | 779 . and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. or changes in building material availability. These changes can be due to owner requests. unanticipated changes in construction conditions.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. double-click Level 4. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click 36 Save the file. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet.

revision descriptions should be comprehensive. type a date. for Numbering. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. In general. verify that Per Project is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. If Visible is not selected. If you select Per Sheet. 5 For Description.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. When you use this option. When Issued is selected. yet as concise as possible. In most instances. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 780 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 7 Under Show. if the active revision is number 1. For example. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1.

move the cursor up. 6 On the Design Bar. you make changes to the project floor plan. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 Save the file. click (Move). under Floor Plans. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. double-click Level 4.8 Click OK. click Modify. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 5 Select the divider. Sketching Revision Clouds | 781 . 3 Select the divider. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. including revision number and revision date.

782 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Finish Sketch.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 8 In the drawing area. and click OK. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. select Snaps Off. 11 On the Design Bar. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. In the Snaps dialog. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. click near the partition you moved.

click the Annotation Objects tab. 17 Save the file. you load a revision tag into the project. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. for Line Weight. select 6. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 16 Click OK. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 783 . 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. 4 On the Options Bar. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 6 Click Load. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Training File 784 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Working with Revisions In this exercise. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Tags dialog. Because you chose to number by project. select Leader. you need to add one. 11 Click to place the tag. you create additional revisions in the revision table. You then issue a revision. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 10 In the drawing area. click Tags. the cloud is tagged as number 1. click Tag ➤ By Category. click OK.rfa.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. and because the revision is the first in the project. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4. 12 Save the file. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 8 In the Tags dialog. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. click Training Files.rvt.

You can continue to add revisions. 8 Add another revision row. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. you can no longer modify it. 7 For Description. double-click A107 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and enter a date for the revision. type Modify Paving Area. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 9 Click OK. and click OK. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.Unnamed. under Sheets. and enter a date. You do this by issuing the revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. with the description Relocate Door. select Issued. NOTE After you issue a revision. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. click Add. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. you prevent further changes to the revision. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.rvt. Working with Revisions | 785 .

click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 17 Using the same method learned previously. 20 On the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 13 Click Finish Sketch.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. select the revision cloud. 2 . Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 11 On the Drafting tab. under Floor Plans.Unnamed. double-click A107 . select Revision Cloud.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. under Sheets (all). 12 In the drawing area.Modify Paving Area. select Seq. in the drawing area. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. apply Seq. 3 . 10 In the Project Browser. 786 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. click to add a revision clouds. select Tag ➤ By Category. 19 To add tags. for Revision. double-click Level 4.

You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. for Sequence. height. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. delete the first 3 characters. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. 26 In the drawing area. clear Issued. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. For each revision. select Alphabetic. 25 Click OK twice. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. select the titleblock. for Numbering. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. beginning with "D".Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Working with Revisions | 787 . Click Options. you edit the titleblock family. and rotation) to the revision schedule. You do this so that the revision can be changed.

28 In the alert dialog. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. and press DELETE. for Appearance. for Build Schedule. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Edit Family. and drag it above the schedule area. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Clear Blank row before data. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 33 Select the schedule header. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. click Modify. Select Grid lines. select Bottom-up. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. Select Outline. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 34 On the Design Bar. and click Properties. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. click Yes. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Load into Projects. 788 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. right-click Revision Schedule. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog.27 On the Options Bar. under Other. click Yes. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. 38 In the Reload Family dialog.

. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. With a user-defined height. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. for Rotation on Sheet. select User defined. and click Properties. for Heading. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. 46 Click OK twice. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. select 90° Counterclockwise. 40 Select the revision schedule header. click Edit. enter Rev. open the titleblock family for editing. Working with Revisions | 789 . When the height property is variable.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. for Formatting. 45 On the Appearance tab. under Other. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. for Height. select the revision schedule. right-click Revision Schedule. and on the Options Bar. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously.

50 In the Reload Family dialog. you learn to import information (such as images.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. 51 Save the file. 790 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Yes. text. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.Importing Image Files In this exercise. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. under Sheets. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. for Leader. click to add text without a leader. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click T . and place it on a sheet. Importing Image Files | 791 . you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 3 On the Options Bar.Title Sheet. double-click T . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.Title Sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. under Sheets. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.JPG. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Text. 5 On the Design Bar.

7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. with the new text box still selected. Training File 792 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .doc text file in another window. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click Modify.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 6 Select the text. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Save the file.

and open Common\Fixture Schedule. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 5 Click OK. and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. This exercise demonstrates a common method. for File name. 3 In Microsoft Excel. under Sheets. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. This process may vary from system to system. click Training Files. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 10 On the Design Bar. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 12 Save the file. Importing Spreadsheets | 793 . click File menu ➤ Print. click Modify. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and saved as Fixture Schedule. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. double-click A102 . you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.JPG. 7 In the Revit MEP window. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.rvt.mdi. click Desktop. type Fixture Schedule. 4 Under Printer.JPG. select the document writer.xls. for Name. This step has been completed for you. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.Unit 18.

794 .

The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. 795 .Using Dependent Views 15 In this tutorial. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The large floor plan. as well as a large lab building. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. To effectively document this project. or footprint. called dependent views.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 796 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 797 . and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area, select the crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

798 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

9 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 799

10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

800 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.)

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 801

■ ■ ■ ■

Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16', and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

802 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9. 28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8'', and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 803

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

804 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 805

46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary. 47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

806 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

51 On the View Control Bar, click Apply dependent view settings to other plans

(Hide Crop Region).

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 807

57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you
■ ■ ■ ■

Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

808 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK. 5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping the view to the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 809

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

810 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 811

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

812 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

Using Advanced Features

813

814

Grouping

16

Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical office layouts. After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.

Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

815

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.

2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

816 | Chapter 16 Grouping

3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 817 .

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. 7 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 818 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify.

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. and click Create Instance. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. expand Model. right-click Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 819 . under Groups. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.14 On the Edit toolbar. clear Copy. 820 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror).

and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 821 .

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. and one rotated. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 20 On the Design Bar. one mirrored. as shown. 822 | Chapter 16 Grouping .

you make changes to an instance of a group. and click to select it. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you finish editing. click Save As. and click Save. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. press TAB to highlight the wall.rvt.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.rvt. Modifying a Group | 823 . 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group In this exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the wall. select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. 7 Click (Group Member. and click member to group instance. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. press TAB.).3 Click (Group Member. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 824 | Chapter 16 Grouping . press TAB.).). and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).

13 In the Type Selector. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Modify. click Wall. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Door. 14 On the Options Bar.8 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. Modifying a Group | 825 . 12 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar.

21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. move the cursor up. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 22 In the drawing area. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening.16 On the Design Bar. In edit group mode. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. click Modify. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 20 On the Options Bar. 826 | Chapter 16 Grouping . the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group.

click 27 For Base Offset. created in an earlier lesson. click Modify. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit.24 On the Design Bar. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. (Element Properties). click Finish. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. enter 3' 4''. enter 7'. for Unconnected Height. Nesting Groups | 827 . Nesting Groups In this exercise. 25 Select the opening. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. which acts as the host. and on the Options Bar. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click OK. 28 On the group editor toolbar. under Constraints. you add the Typical Kitchen group.

2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. in the Project Browser. click Edit Group. 828 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 5 In the drawing area. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 4 On the group editor toolbar. click (Add to Group). double-click First Floor. select the Typical Kitchen group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. under Floor Plans.

6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. 7 On the group editor toolbar. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. and each of the bifold doors. Nesting Groups | 829 . 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors.

Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. such as door and window tags. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 830 | Chapter 16 Grouping . and create an attached detail group containing the tags. you add door tags to a group. and filled regions. such as text.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.rvt. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. In the next exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

click to draw a rectangular region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 831 . A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. and select a point below the left elevator.

as shown. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 12 Enter Tile. click to add an arc leader. 832 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click Modify. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. and select the text note and the filled region. click (Group). The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. and click OK. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and on the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Text. 16 In the drawing area.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 14 On the Edit toolbar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point.

and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group.18 On the Design Bar. double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 21 In the drawing area. under Groups. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 833 . 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Create Instance. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 20 In the Project Browser. Because the detail group contains variables. expand Detail. under Floor Plans.

you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 834 | Chapter 16 Grouping . under Floor Plans. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags.rvt.manner that a drawing component can be added. clear Leader. click Modify. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. double-click First Floor. as shown. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 5 On the Design Bar. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.

enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. for Attached Detail Group Name. click Check None. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 835 . 11 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). click (Group). 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. select Door Tags. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 8 In the Filter dialog. and click OK.

Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. When you load the group from the library into a new project. click Place Detail. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click Modify. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. therefore. Training File 836 | Chapter 16 Grouping .13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 16 On the Design Bar. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. and click OK. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags.

12 On the Design Bar. select 2 Bedroom Unit. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 3 For File name. and click Create Instance. verify that Same as group name is selected. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. verify that Project is selected. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. and click Save Group. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. click Desktop. expand Groups. for Create new. In this case. click Modify.rvt. accept the default template file. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 5 In the New Project dialog. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups | 837 .rvt. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and expand Model. A warning dialog displays. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click OK.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. browse to the Desktop. under Groups\Model. and click Save. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor.

838 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Bind. and click OK. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. click Modify. click Link. and on the Options Bar. verify that Attached Details is selected only. and the link is removed.rvt. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Training Files. 17 On the Design Bar. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click OK. 24 In the message dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project.rvt file is added as a link to the project. When a group is converted to a link. click Use Existing. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Remove Link. expand Revit Links. select the linked Revit model. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 18 In the Project Browser.

If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you must first enable Worksharing. The first time you activate worksets within a project. doors. and click Editable. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. such as annotations and dimensions. called Worksharing. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. they cannot make changes to it. All other team members can view this workset. Elements specific to a view. When you are working on a shared project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. To make a workset editable. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. In this tutorial. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. go to the Worksets dialog. stairs. You can enable Worksharing for any project. such as walls. Working in a shared project In a shared project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. This prevents possible conflicts within the project.Sharing Projects 17 When working with large building projects. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. floors. use Element Borrowing. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. 839 . select the desired workset. Using Worksharing. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit MEP 2009. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. After the project is shared. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. A workset is a collection of building elements. you specify an active workset. and so on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. however.

Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. In a multi-story structure. Instead. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. In the next exercise. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can select which worksets are open or closed. After learning the fundamentals. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets required for your work. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. When setting up Worksharing. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Team size 840 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . such as a tenant interior.

Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. You should have at least one workset for each person. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. with each assigned a specific functional task. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. This allows Revit MEP to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. In most projects. Team member roles Typically. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. As new members create worksets for their own use. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. for a typical project. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. designers work in teams. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 841 . When creating the new worksets. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Regardless of the default setting. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Experience has shown that. each team member has control over a portion of the design. When you create a new workset. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. On this tab. Shared Levels and Grids. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. not including the Project Standards. and View worksets.

you can select which workset is active. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. 842 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. For example. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. When finished or at regular intervals. However. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. As you work. however. When you save to the central file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. your changes are saved. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you make that workset editable by you. within the local file. the file is saved as the central file. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. When you save locally (to your local file). you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. On the Options Bar. Therefore. This is called “Selective Open. you should then save to your local file. This makes them available to other team members. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. proceeds as usual. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Generally. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. After saving to the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. if a workset named Interior was created. When you save to the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file.

You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. reload the latest changes from the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. In this instance. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. Alternatively. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. save to the central file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. and then save the local file. To do this. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. and make that workset editable. you should check out the Materials workset. In this situation. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. using VPN. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 843 . Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. When working remotely. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. In this conceptual exercise. if you know who checked out the required workset. for instance. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit MEP. make any required worksets editable. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you work no differently then you would in the office.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file.

you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Your username displays as the present owner. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. The Worksets dialog displays. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 3 In the Worksets dialog. under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Worksets. and open Common\c_Worksets. and notice all are editable by you. click Training Files.In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 844 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects .

a third team member is assigned furniture placement. 13 In the Rename dialog. click New. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. you can rename the default workset. imagine four users including yourself. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. select Workset1. it is better to make them visible by default. In this training file. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. click OK. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. a small number of team members are working on the building model. In this simple training project. expand Views (all). In this case. expand Floor Plans. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. however.When you enable worksharing. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. 9 Click New. Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Project Standards. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 12 Click Rename. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. clear Families. ■ 5 Under Show. another is assigned the interior layout. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. type the name Exterior Shell. For example. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Because the interior walls appear in many views. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. You do. 14 In the Worksets dialog. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. Therefore. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. When you initially activate Worksharing. and Views. 11 In the Worksets dialog. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 8 Click OK. currently named Workset1. clear Visible by default in all views. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 845 . 16 In the drawing area. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Only User-Created worksets should display. and click OK. For training purposes. and double-click Level 1. select any of the exterior walls of the building model.

28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click . Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click Visibility/Graphics. 19 Click OK. 846 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 26 On the View menu. and walls. click . stairs. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. click the Worksets tab. click . This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset.17 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 24 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 23 Select all of the interior elements. select Interior Layout for Workset. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. and click OK. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Identity Data. 29 Click OK. including the interior doors.

created new worksets to accommodate each team member. and click OK. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. click Save As. 42 On the right side of the dialog. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 38 In the Save As dialog. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. select all of the interior elements of the building model. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. under Views (all). 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. 43 Click OK. In this exercise. 39 Click Save. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. If any interior elements remain. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. under Identity Data. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. click Visibility/Graphics. 34 In the drawing area.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 33 In the Project Browser. click Close. click . you enabled Worksharing on a project. 44 On the File menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. double-click Level 2. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 41 In the Worksets dialog. 30 On the View menu. make sure you remember the location of this central file. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. select Interior Layout for Workset. 35 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 847 . click Worksets. 32 Select Interior Layout. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. click the Worksets tab. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. Now that you have created the central file. click Non Editable. and click OK.

2 In the Open dialog.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 7 In the Save As dialog. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 844. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. click Worksets. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click Save As. select Interior Layout for Name. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. check out worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. you create your local file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Options. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. In this case. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Next. 848 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . make modifications to the building model. 6 On the File menu. 12 Click OK. expand Views (all). click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. select the central file. expand Floor Plans. select Interior Layout. and click OK. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 4 Click Open. and click OK. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. and double-click Level 1. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and select Specify. and select Yes for Editable. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. please do so before continuing. and click Save. 13 On the Window menu. Before working on the model. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. If you have not yet completed the exercise. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. select all the User-Created worksets. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. In addition. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 15 In the Project Browser. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Open.

23 On the File menu. 21 On the Options Bar. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. under Identity Data. In the Worksets dialog. Because this element is not owned by another user. notice the Editable Only option. If this is selected. In this case. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. however. 22 Click OK. click Worksets.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. and click OK. If it was owned by another user. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 24 Click OK. click . 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click . notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you can still edit this wall. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 Under Constraints. Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies your changes. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Working Individually with Worksets | 849 . Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. On the Options Bar. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Verify that it is cleared. click Modify.

32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. click Modify. click Door.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. The precise location is not important. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 26 Delete the door. 33 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior .126mm Partition (2-hr). 29 In the Type Selector. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 31 On the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 28 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 34 In the Type Selector. click Wall. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 850 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects .

Saving your work 36 On the File menu. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. you created your local file. When working in your local file. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. displays the workset as well as the element type. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Whenever you save. two users access the central file through a network connection. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. please do so before continuing. checked out worksets. save to central. it is recommended. In addition. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. At the end of a work session. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. Borrowed Elements is selected. By default. click Save to Central. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. In this particular case. add two door openings into the rooms you created. a tooltip. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you should relinquish all worksets. you should perform regular saves. and reload the latest changes. each user must check out worksets. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. You modified the building model. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. make elements editable. In this exercise. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. leave this file open in its current state. which matches the information in the Status Bar. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. and save locally immediately afterward. For training purposes. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 851 . Throughout the process.

verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. This is a system setting. and click OK. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. enter User 2. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. one user has already created a local file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Open. 3 On the Settings menu. and click OK. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. return to the Settings dialog. 12 In the Save As dialog. click Save As. 4 Click the General Tab and. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. instructions are staggered. In addition. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and select Specify. 852 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and click Save. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 11 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This file is for your use only. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and proceed to Creating a local copy. and select Yes for Editable. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 7 In the Open dialog. specifically sequenced. In the following section of this exercise. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. For training purposes. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 9 Click Open. You now have a local copy of the project. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. click Options. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 2 Start a new Revit MEP session by double-clicking the Revit MEP icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 15 On the File menu. User 2: Create a local file. click Options. under Username. select the central file.rvt. consider that person to be User 1. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. click Worksets. and click OK. select all the User-Created worksets. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Using a second Revit MEP session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit MEP window. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. skip the following section.

open it now. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. it becomes the active workset. User 1: Check out worksets. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. modify the building model.” 29 Click OK. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. expand Floor Plans. and select Yes for Editable. 23 Click OK. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.You are now the owner of that workset. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 853 . 28 In the Save to Central dialog. If it is not open. and double-click Level 1. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. If you only have one workset checked out. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. click Worksets. 27 On the File menu. 17 Click OK. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). click Save to Central. 19 On the File menu. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and double-click Level 1. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. select the lower exterior wall.

and click OK. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 854 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. Click Yes. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. right-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 35 Click OK. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. under Floor Plans. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 41 On the File menu. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. you should create a furniture plan view. 42 Select Furniture Layout. Before adding any furniture. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 44 In the Project Browser. and click OK. When you save to central. 43 In the Project Browser. 33 On the File menu. click Save to Central. User 1: Reload latest worksets. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Yes for Editable. 45 In the Rename View dialog. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 37 On the File menu. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Reload Latest. The changes User 2 made are apparent.” 39 Click OK. and click Rename. click Save to Central. right-click Copy of Level 1. click Worksets. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 46 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. However.

66 On the File menu. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. select Project Standards. rather than Families. 65 Click OK. under Show. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. enter Exterior Wall . click Component. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created.200mm. click Save to Central. 49 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics.” 55 Click OK. click Reload Latest. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Worksets. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. NOTE System families. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. and click inside any room. click Edit/New. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Therefore. are placed under Project Standards. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 855 . such as Wall Types. and click OK. 53 On the File menu. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 50 On the View menu. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. and click OK. 62 On the File menu. 60 In the Rename dialog. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. click Modify. 48 In the Type Selector. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Save to Central. choose any desk. click Rename. 61 Click OK 2 times.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click the Worksets tab.

In the final exercise of this tutorial. you save the training file as a central file. Checking out worksets. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. and still have your local files open. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 856. click Save As. and save 69 On the File menu. select Save to Central. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. and click OK. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. click Options. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. leave this file open in its current state. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 3 In the Save As dialog. modified the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Each user checked out worksets. In subsequent steps. As each of you work. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. click Training Files. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 70 On the File menu. select Reload Latest. and published their changes back to the central file. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. There are specific instructions for each user. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Each user must have network access to the central file.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. At the appropriate point in this exercise. throughout this training. 856 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . User 1: Reload latest. This exercise requires two users and. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. select the following. leave this file open in its current state. you need to set up your central and local files. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. and these problems are rectified. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). finished the previous workset exercises.

12 On the File menu. On the Settings menu. This is the local file for User 1. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Set the Username to User 2. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 18 In the Save As dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and select Specify. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 13 In the Open dialog. and click Save. The central file should still be open. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 857 . This is a system setting. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. Click the General tab of the Options dialog.4 In the File Save Options dialog. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. return to the Settings dialog. click Save As. Next. 15 Click Open. click Options. click Options. click Save As. select Make this a Central File after save. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 6 On the File menu. and click OK. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 17 On the File menu. select the central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Options. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and click OK. In addition. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. click Open. 5 Click Save. and reset the Username to your computer login name. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. ■ ■ ■ This Revit MEP session is now set up for User 2. and click OK.

the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 29 On the Options Bar. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select them. click Worksets. 26 In the Worksets dialog. and click Editing Requests. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. and select Yes for Editable. select the second window from the top.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 24 Under Active Workset. and select Yes for Editable. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. You are now the owner of that workset. select Interior Layout. After you submit the request. You are now the owner of that workset. select Exterior Shell. if any User-Created worksets are not open. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. At this point. and then click OK. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 30 On the left exterior wall. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. select the Interior Layout workset. 22 In the Worksets dialog. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 858 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and then click OK. click the File menu. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. Afterwards. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 27 Under Active Workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. and click Open. click Worksets.

select Save to Central. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and close 39 On the File menu. 35 Click Grant. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 859 . select the request submitted by User 2. In this case. 36 Click Close.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and click OK. select the following. click Check Now. you requested permission to edit the element. 38 Click OK. click Close. to Local. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. In this multi-user exercise. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and notice the window is in the new location. and the other user granted it.

860 .

you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. After you and the client agree on the final design. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. 861 . you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In this tutorial. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. At any time in the design process.Creating Multiple Design Options 18 When working with a building model. In addition. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. For example.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. and delete the unwanted options from the project. click New. After you create a design option. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you design each of the structural options. In the second exercise. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the first exercise in this lesson. In the final exercise of this lesson. 862 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. 2 In the Design Options dialog. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. each with multiple design options. each is constructed for interchangeability.rvt. the roof and structure systems must work together. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you set up multiple design option sets. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. under Option Set. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. TIP In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. make your final design decision. The client has asked you to create various options. With the second option.In this particular case. you can edit it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. therefore. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. the only available command is to create a new option set. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create.

or add a dimension string between the columns. and the third column centered between the two. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected.3 Select Option 1 (primary). The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 9 On the Design Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. expand Floor Plans. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). and click Close. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. click Modify. In the following illustration. Creating the Structural Design Options | 863 . either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. TIP To center the middle column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. click Column. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. click 12 On the Options Bar. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 4 In the Project Browser. add three columns. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 7 In the Type Selector. By selecting Multiple. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. In this case. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. click Edit Selected. 5 On the View menu. expand Views (all). 11 On the Edit toolbar.

18 On the View toolbar. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 864 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. When you are finished. using the same technique.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. they are difficult to see in this view. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click . A copy of the three selected columns is added. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. Because of the size of the columns. 17 Zoom out and.

Next. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 865 . You can do this manually or use the Copy command. select Round Bar : 2". you add the beams that span the columns. and click at its center to set the beam start point. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Use the following illustration as a guide. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. In it. double-click TOP OF CORE. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. Zoom in on the upper right column. click Modify.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. click Beam. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans.

and select the center of the column to add a copy. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.25 On the Edit toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. and click the center point. 30 On the View toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. select: ■ ■ ■ . click . 866 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 Zoom out. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. zoom into the left column. click 26 On the Options Bar.

under Option. enter Beam for New. 40 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. name the option Louvers. 43 In the Rename dialog. 41 Under Option Set. under Option Set. enter Structure for New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 867 . and click OK. 46 Under Option. click Rename. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 45 Under Roofing. 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. and click OK. click New. under Option Set. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. click New. 36 In the Rename dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option. 33 Click Finish Editing. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. select Option 1 (primary). under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. click Rename. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. enter Roofing for New. not a new option set. click Rename.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click New. under Option. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. enter Brackets for New.

You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 50 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. and click OK. 51 Under Edit. This allows you to more easily manage the project. under Structure. 52 Click Close. Under Now Editing. select Beam. 53 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click ROOF TERRACE. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. it will resemble the following illustration. name the option Sunscreen. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 868 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 48 Under Option. select Edit Selected. When finished. select Option 2. you create the second design option.47 Under Roofing.

58 On the Tools menu. click Align. Creating the Structural Design Options | 869 . click Component.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Refer to the following illustration. The second click represents the plane that is moved. select Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 56 In the Type Selector. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam.

click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click to indicate the end point of the move. 870 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. click Modify. 61 On the Design Bar. 62 Select the beam and. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The second click represents the move end point. on the Edit toolbar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.60 After aligning the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. The first click sets the move start point.

click Save As. 66 On the View toolbar. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 70 On the File menu. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click .rvt. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 69 Click Close. which is visible by default. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice that even before you close the dialog. and click Save. you need this file in its current state. Creating the Structural Design Options | 871 . 67 On the Tools menu. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Finish Editing. 68 In the Design Options dialog. name the file. i_Urban_House-in progress. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.

Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. If you need to add dimensions. do so now. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. The first option. under Roofing. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. open it now.rvt. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. the other for beams. 2 On the Tools menu. In the next exercise.In this exercise. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. a Louver system. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Sunscreen. Under Now Editing. select Louvers (primary). expand Views (all). 8 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. The second roofing system. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. each with multiple design options to pick from. click Component. expand Floor Plans. 10 Referring to the following illustration. and double-click TOP OF CORE. you set up multiple design option sets. 872 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 4 Under Edit. 5 Click Close. select Rafter 2 x 10. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. delete them after the rafter is in place. click Edit Selected. With the second option. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. you design each of the roofing options. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 3 In the Design Options dialog.

click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. Select 2nd for Move To. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. under Other. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 16 On the Options Bar. Enter 5 for Number. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click . Select Constrain. 15 On the Edit menu.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 38' 6" for Length. 13 On the Options Bar. click Array. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 873 . click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

TIP When entering a dimension value. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. 874 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. For example. enter 3' 3". you can enter 3 3. The space separates feet and inches. and press ENTER. rather than entering 3' 3".

and click Array. select Louver 2 x 6. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. click . click Component. Enter 34 for Number. 25 With the louver still selected. click the Edit menu. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. and click OK. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 875 . enter 1’. 27 For the array starting point. and select the louver you just placed. when the listening dimension displays. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and. 26 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. click Modify. and press Enter.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 20 In the Type Selector. Select 2nd for Move To. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration.

876 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Edit. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The louver roof system is complete. click . click Finish Editing. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 29 On the View toolbar. 30 On the Tools menu. 31 In the Design Options dialog.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart.

Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. Therefore. 43 On the Design Bar. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. You will fix this in a later step. and the third point defines the arc. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 877 . click . The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. the top of the next column on the right. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. expand Elevations. 33 Under Editing. 41 Select the top of the left column. Click OK. under Roofing. click Properties. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 40 On the Options Bar. select Sunscreen. and double-click West. then you can modify it through the dimension. and then click Close. click Edit Selected. click Lines. 34 In the Project Browser. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. In this case. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. The first two points define the ends of the line. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 39 On the Design Bar. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen.

Sunscreen. click Save. The arcs should connect. 52 On the File menu. Select the right arc. 51 In the Design Options dialog. click Finish Editing. Under Constraints. 50 On the Tools menu. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. The second roofing system. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and then click Close. 878 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . In this exercise. 46 On the Tools menu. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. Under Constraints. 48 On the Design Bar. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. The louver roof system is complete. click . click Finish Sketch. 49 On the View toolbar. click Trim/Extend. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The first option. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. then the center arc. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you need this file in its current state. you designed each of the roofing options. a Louver system. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers.44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 Click OK. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. under Edit.

10 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. under 3D Views. 11 On the View menu. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. secondary. and click Rename. tertiary. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. under Views (all). you must create a named 3D view for the primary. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Managing Design Options | 879 . right-click the 3D View Primary Option. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. and last options. under 3D Views. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. click the Design Options tab. 5 Right-click each of the copies. you select a design. enter Primary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. 4 In the Project Browser. do so now. and click OK. under Views (all). make it part of the building model. right-click {3D}.Managing Design Options In this exercise. 9 Click OK. double-click Primary Option. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. double-click Secondary Option. 7 On the View menu. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. expand 3D Views. and delete the discarded design options. and click Rename. After exploring the combinations. under Views (all). 3 In the Rename View dialog.

under 3D Views. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. and click OK. double-click Last Option. under 3D Views. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all).13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 14 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 15 On the View menu. 880 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 19 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. double-click Tertiary Option.

the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 29 Select Roofing. select Beam. Managing Design Options | 881 . 23 In the Design Options dialog. under Structure. 30 Under Option Set. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. In your design options. The set is deleted. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. Because the client has selected the design option. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 27 In the alert dialog. click Yes. since you no longer need them. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. In this case. 22 On the Tools menu.At this point. 25 Select Structure. 26 Under Option Set. click Accept Primary. This was the client choice for structural. 31 In the alert dialog. click Delete. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 24 Under Option. An alert is displayed. select Make Primary. click Close. the current primaries are no longer options. click Yes. the beam option becomes part of the model. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. double-click Primary Option.

In this exercise.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. click Save. After exploring the combinations. you selected a design. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 882 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . and deleted the discarded design options. made it part of the building model. 35 On the File menu.

demolish existing walls and doors. In the lesson and exercises that follow. You create new phases. and then add new building model elements. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. This changes room definition and total building model area. demolish existing construction. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. complete with schedules. 883 . you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. In the second exercise. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project.Project Phasing 19 In any project. then add new walls and doors in a different location. For the client. You create new phases. In the second exercise.

you do not need to change the project units to metric. and open Common\c_Phasing. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click Cancel. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. In the Element Properties dialog. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. expand Floor Plans. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Modify. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. under Phasing. and click OK. If you wish to do so. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. click (Element Properties). 884 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Cancel. define the units.rvt. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. click Training Files. go to the Settings menu. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. 6 On the Options Bar. under Phasing. regardless of phase. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. click Project Units. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. and double-click Level 1. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. As you add new elements to the building model. are visible in this view. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. When you create a new project. expand Views (all). View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. This means that all building model elements. During the demolition and renovation process. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 . and click Rename. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. select Existing. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1 . 12 On the Options Bar. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. enter Level 1 .Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area.Existing. and click Rename. 10 On the Options Bar. TIP If this were a multi-story building. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 11 In the Filter dialog.Demo. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click . you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. all of the building model elements. 17 Click No. clear Door Tags. 16 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. Because this is a renovation project. 14 On the Design Bar. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 19 In the Project Browser. for Phase Created. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views.Existing. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. right-click Level 1. under Phasing. under Floor Plans. including the door tags.Existing. click Modify. After you release the mouse button. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans. Because this is a phase-specific view. enter Level 1 . After you create the views. Phasing Your Model | 885 . Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. are highlighted in red.

however. Because of this time relationship. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. to which all the building model elements belong. you modify these settings. 26 In the Phasing dialog. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. and click OK. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. In this case. and Temporary. enter Composite Plan. 28 Under Filter Name. double-click Level 1 . 27 Click New. There are five default phase filters. Next. 29 For Composite Plan. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. Phase status is time-dependent. 886 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. select Existing. Existing. Later in this exercise. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. new construction occurs after existing construction. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 .Existing. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. Demolished. under Floor Plans.Demo. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. You may need to zoom in to see this. under New. 21 In the Project Browser. click the Phase Filters tab. for Phase. under Phasing. select Overridden. On a logical time line.

you demolish all elements hosted by it. click (Demolish). 42 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Demolished row. 35 Click OK twice. As you click each wall. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. 39 In the Phasing dialog. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. Next. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. select Demolished. select red. 36 Using the same method. select the line style. There are two ways to demolish an element. under Cut ➤ Lines. click OK. its display changes to a red dashed line. you begin demolition. Phasing Your Model | 887 . 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. When you demolish the host. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. click the value for Color. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. or you can use the demolish tool. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All.Existing.31 Under Phase Status. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. select the interior walls one at a time. 34 In the Color dialog. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished.Demo. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. select a lighter blue.

Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. select Basic Wall: Interior .44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. The demolished walls no longer display. click Door. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 51 Add a door leading into each room. and click OK. for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 Open Level 1 . 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 888 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . 50 In the Type Selector. select Show Previous + New.Demo. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. under Phasing. click Wall. add a long horizontal wall. under Phasing. 49 On the Design Bar. 52 Open Level 1 .Existing. for Phase Filter. 47 In the Type Selector. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

New. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 62 If necessary. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. Phasing Your Model | 889 .Demo. 59 Open Level 1 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and existing shows as half-tone.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. The renovated building model plan is displayed. because the phase filter is set to Show All. regardless of phase. new is shown in blue. 57 In the Project Browser. which are displayed as red. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.New. right-click Level 1 . 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 61 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). 60 On the View toolbar. All elements are displayed in this view. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.

Notice that this view is the original building model. and double-click Level 1 . 890 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Open Level 1 .Existing. In this exercise. If you wish to do so. If you wish to save this file. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. click Project Units. In this view. therefore.New. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. you can do so at this time. the rooms change in both definition and size. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. You can also see that the room quantities. expand Floor Plans. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. sizes. click Training Files. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation.Demo. and new construction. In this view. All room boundaries are phase-specific. define the units. and click OK. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial.rvt. demolition. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. go to the Settings menu. expand Views (all). Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. In the next exercise. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. 2 Open Level 1 . you can see the new walls added to the building model. As the renovation process continues. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 63 Close the file.

13 Open Level 1 . 11 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. In the Phasing dialog. yet they have different room numbers.New. 6 Open Level 1 .4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 891 .Demo. click Modify. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Room Tag. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. and maximize the view. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click in each room as you move to the right. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Room. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Open Level 1 .Existing.

This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases.Existing. View phase-specific room schedules. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 19 On the Window menu. 20 Close the file. In this exercise. 16 In the Project Browser. 18 Open Room Schedule . The two schedule views tile. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. In addition. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. In this case. and double-click Room Schedule . click Tile.New Construction. click Close Hidden Windows. 17 On the Window menu. expand Schedules/Quantities. 892 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing .

Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. In these situations. You position the building models on the site plan. Comparison of alternatives on a site. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. performance. In this tutorial. 893 . A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. and manage the links throughout the project. This maximizes efficiency. modify their visibility. In the final lesson.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus.

NOTE The center of a Revit MEP model is the center of the model geometry.Linking Building Models In this lesson. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. 894 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. You link two building models to the project. modify their visibility. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. and the other is a townhouse. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit MEP 2009 to automatically place it. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes.Center to Center: Revit MEP places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You position the building models on the site. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium.

Select c_Site. 2 On the File menu. in the Model Linking folder that you created. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . and click Properties. click Training Files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 895 . you can do so. click Open.rvt. this system is not exposed to the user. and click OK. RELATED See the lesson.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. click Close. click Save As. c_Townhouse. and save the file there.■ Auto . use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. Auto . All three files now reside. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Otherwise.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit MEP Files. however. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. NOTE Revit MEP projects have an internal coordinate system. right-click. select the three files. 5 On the File menu. ■ ■ Manual . and open Common\c_Site. click Open. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 911. Manual . 4 On the File menu.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit MEP model. with write permission. This option is grayed out.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 8 Clear Read-only. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. c_Condo_Complex. this option will place the link at a predefined location.

and double-click Level 1. Notice the blue detail lines. For Positioning. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 896 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Auto . 13 Click Open. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.■ Click Open. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.Origin to Origin. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the File menu.

click (Move). 16 For the move start point. Standard move commands work with linked building models. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. 17 For the move endpoint. After you specify the location to move to. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. Linking Building Models from Di